Nissan 2010 Sentra Users Manual Owner's

Nissan-2010-Nissan-Sentra-Owners-Manual-818538 nissan-2010-nissan-sentra-owners-manual-818538

2010 Sentra to the manual b50f2eb5-89ee-4604-8f1b-631dcbac3116

2015-01-21

: Nissan Nissan-2010-Sentra-Users-Manual-348733 nissan-2010-sentra-users-manual-348733 nissan pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 360 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2010 Sentra Owner's Manual
OM0E-0B16U2
Table of Contents

2010 SENTRA

OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2010 NISSAN SENTRA B16-D

Printing : February 2010

Publication No.: OM0E 0B16U2

Printed in U.S.A. B16-D

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide” explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or have any

questions, they will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance require-

ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Preteen

children should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability, and

may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or per-

formance problems resulting from modi-

fications may not be covered under

NISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual includes information for all options

available on this model. Therefore, you may find

some information that does not apply to your

vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design without notice and with-

out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

BLUETOOTH威is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed

to Visteon.

XM Radio威requires

subscription, sold

separately after first

90 days. Not available

in Alaska, Hawaii or

Guam. For more

information, visit

www.xmradio.com.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . . .............0-8

Warning/indicator lights ...........................0-10

1. Top tether anchor (P. 1-28)

2. Rear headrest (P. 1-5)

3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-13)

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)

6. Front-seat Active Head Restraint

(P. 1-10)

7. Front seat belts (P. 1-13)

8. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-43)

9. Seats (P. 1-2)

10. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-43)

11. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-57)

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-26)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0088

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-23)

2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-20)

3. Windshield (P. 8-20)

4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

5. Power windows (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34)

6. Door locks, keyfob (if so equipped),

NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ (if so

equipped), keys (P. 3-4, 3-7, 3-11, 3-2)

7. Mirrors (P. 3-28)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)

9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)

10. Tire chains (P. 8-38)

11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-22)

12. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

13. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)

14. Tie down hook (if so equipped)

(P. 6-14)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0089

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Trunk lid (P.3-23 )

2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)

3. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)

4. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-21)

5. Child safety locks (P. 3-7)

6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)

7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)

8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

9. Rear tie down hook (if so equipped)

(P. 6-14)

10. Exterior trunk lid release/request button

(P. 3-17, 3-24)

11. Rear view camera (P. 4-8)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0176

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Rear seat (P. 1-3)

2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

3. Interior lights, illuminated entry,

moonroof switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-39, P. 2-22, P. 2-37)

4. Sun visors (P. 3-27)

5. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28)

6. Glove box (P. 2-31)

7. Cup holders (P. 2-30)

8. Parking brake, parking on hills

(P. 5-19, P. 5-23)

9. Front seat (P. 1-2)

10. Front console (P. 2-31)

11. Rear armrest, cup holders

(if so equipped) (P. 1-7, P 2-30)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0091

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)

/turn signal switch (P. 2-22); Manual

shift paddles (if so equipped) (P.5-15)

2. Steering wheel switch for audio control

and Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone

System (if so equipped) (P. 4-60, 4-62)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn

(P. 1-43, 2-25)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-23)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-20)

8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-27)

9. Audio system (P. 4-31, 4-34, 4-38)

10. Center ventilator (P. 4-14)

11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-43)

12. Side ventilator (P. 4-14)

13. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)

14. Engine oil pressure gauge

(if so equipped) (P. 2-7)

15. g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped)

(P. 2-6)

16. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24)

17. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24); Manual shift

mode switch (if so equipped) (P.5-15)

18. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-44)

19. Glove box (P. 2-31)

20. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-43)

21. Climate control (P. 4-14)

22. Shift selector (P. 5-12)

23. Power outlet (P. 2-26)

24. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)

WIC1600

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

25. Tilt steering (P.3-27)

26. Storage bin (P. 2-28)

27. Hood release lever (P. 3-23)

28 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) (P.2-16)

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

MR20DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-13)

4. Battery (P. 8-15)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)

7. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

9. Drive belt location (P.8-16)

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LDI0709

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-13)

4. Battery (P. 8-15)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)

7. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

9. Drive belt location (P.8-16)

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

*Engine cover removed for clarity.

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WDI0637

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light (if so

equipped)

2-10

Brake warning light 2-10

Charge warning light 2-11

Door open warning

light

2-11

Electric power

steering warning

light

2-11

Engine oil pressure

warning light

2-11

Warning

light

Name Page

Low fuel warning

light

2-12

Low tire pressure

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-12

Low windshield-

washer fluid warning

light (if so equipped)

2-13

NISSAN Intelligent

Key™ warning light

(if so equipped)

3-3

P position selecting

warning light (CVT

models) (if so

equipped)

2-13

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-13

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-14

Indicator

light

Name Page

Continuously Vari-

able Transmission

(CVT) position indi-

cator light (CVT

models)

2-14

Cruise main switch

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-14

Cruise set switch

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-14

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-14

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-14

Malfunction Indica-

tor Light (MIL)

2-15

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator

light

Name Page

Overdrive off indica-

tor light (CVT mod-

els)

2-15

Security indicator

light

2-15

Side light and head-

light indicator light

(green)

2-16

Slip indicator light (if

so equipped)

2-16

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-16

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-16

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment ....................1-2

Rear folding seat system (if so equipped) .........1-3

Head restraints.................................1-7

Adjustable headrest (if so equipped).............1-10

Seat belts .......................................1-13

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-13

Pregnant women ..............................1-16

Injured persons................................1-16

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-16

Seat belt extenders ............................1-22

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-22

Child safety ......................................1-23

Infants........................................1-23

Small children.................................1-23

Larger children ................................1-24

Child restraints ...................................1-24

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-24

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System .............................1-26

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH.......................................1-29

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts .................................1-31

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH..................................1-33

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ............................1-35

Installing top tether strap .......................1-39

Booster seats .................................1-39

Supplemental restraint system .....................1-43

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .......................................1-43

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-58

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-58

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” later in this

section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

●The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you

slide the seat forward or backward to the desired

position. Release the bar to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later

in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined

to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is

stopped and the shift selector (CVT) is in P (Park)

or the manual transmission is in N (Neutral) with

the parking brake applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s

seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust

the seat height until the desired position is

achieved.

REAR FOLDING SEAT SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

WRS0719 WRS0720 WRS0721

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Interior trunk access (if so equipped)

The trunk can be accessed from the rear seat for

loading and unloading, as shown.

1. Stow outboard seat belts with clip before

folding rear seatbacks.

When folding the passenger’s side rear seat-

back, first disconnect and stow the center seat

belt. See “Stowing the rear center seat belt” later

in this section.

2. Pull up on the strap 䊊

Alocated on the top

outboard side of the seat to be folded.

3. Fold seatback down.

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

LRS0728 WRS0726

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Folding the rear cushions and

seatbacks (if so equipped)

1. Lift up on the front edge of the seat cushion

and fold it toward the front of the vehicle.

2. Fold down the rear headrest. Pull the head-

rest forward and rotate until it clicks into the

locked position 䊊

WRS0827 LRS0730 LRS0733

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

3. To return the headrest to the normal position,

push down 䊊

1and release then rotate up

until in position 䊊

4. Fold down seatbacks. See “Interior trunk

access” earlier in this section.

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

LRS0734 LRS0731

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Center armrest (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-

hicle safety systems. They may provide

additional protection against injury in cer-

tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head

restraints properly, as specified in this

section. Check the adjustment after

someone else uses the seat. Do not attach

anything to the head restraint stalks or

remove the head restraint. Do not use the

seat if the head restraint has been re-

moved. If the head restraint was removed,

reinstall and properly adjust the head re-

straint before an occupant uses the seat-

ing position. Failure to follow these in-

structions can reduce the effectiveness of

the head restraints. This may increase the

risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints. All of the head

restraints are adjustable.

䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a head restraint.

WIC1097 LRS0893

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint down. Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the ad-

justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest

position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-

straint before an occupant uses the seating

position.

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is

facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notches 䊊

1must be installed

in the hole with the lock knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-

ing the force that the seatback receives from the

occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement

of the head restraint helps support the occu-

pant’s head by reducing its backward movement

and helping absorb some of the forces that may

lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions

at low to medium speeds in which it is said that

whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as

described in this section.

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (if so

equipped)

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement the

other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust

the headrests properly, as specified in this

section. Check the adjustment after

someone else uses the seat. Do not attach

anything to the adjustable headrest stalks

or remove the adjustable headrests. Do

not use the seat if the adjustable head-

rests have been removed. If the headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly adjust

the headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position. Failure to follow these

instructions can reduce the effectiveness

of the adjustable headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death in

a collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the

headrests are adjustable.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with

an adjustable headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

SPA1025 LRS0898

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Components

1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Adjustment

Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the

center of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the headrest, pull it up.

LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the headrest down. Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the ad-

justable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose

in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

Install

1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing

the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-

justment notches 䊊

1must be installed in the

hole with the lock knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-

cupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you drive,

even if your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be worn

at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat and, if appro-

priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur

if the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material, or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-

vated, it cannot be reused and must be

replaced together with the retractor.

See your NISSAN dealer.

●Removal and installation of preten-

sioner system components should be

done by a NISSAN dealer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any collision

by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies in

use during a collision be replaced un-

less the collision was minor and the

belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision should also

be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and

always position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-

dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual front seat shown

WRS0719

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

䊊

2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion permits the seat belt to

move, and allows you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

䊊

3Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

䊊

4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow

the driver and passengers some freedom of

movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during

certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child

restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-

straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.

WRS0137 WRS0138

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passengers may

be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

䊊

1To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on

the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-

tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about seat belt opera-

tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

LRS0767

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Center of the rear seat (except SE-R

model)

The rear seat center seat belt has a connector

tongue 䊊

1and a seat belt tongue 䊊

2. Both the

connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must

be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-

tion.

WARNING

●Always fasten the connector tongue

and the seat belt in the order shown.

●Always make sure both the connector

tongue and the seat belt tongue are

secured when using the seat belt or

installing a child restraint. Do not use

the seat belt or child restraint with only

the seat belt tongue attached. This

could result in serious personal injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop.

SSS0240 SSS0241

WRS0735

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Stowing the rear center seat belt

When folding down the rear seat, the center seat

belt can be retracted into a stowed position as

follows:

䊊

1Hold the connector tongue so that the seat

belt does not retract suddenly when the

tongue is released from the connector

buckle. Release the connector tongue by

inserting a suitable tool such as key into the

connector buckle 䊊

䊊

2Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

䊊

3Insert the seat belt connector buckle into the

fabric sleeve to stow.

WARNING

●Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

●When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the seat-

backs are completely secured in the

latched position and the rear center

seat belt connector is completely

secured.

●If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured in

the correct position, serious personal

injury may result in an accident or sud-

den stop.

WRS0736

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Attaching the rear center seat belt

Always be sure the center seat belt connector

tongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-

connect only when folding down the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

䊊

1Pull out the connector buckle from the fabric

sleeve.

䊊

2Pull out the connector tongue.

䊊

3Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver

buckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-

ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < marks.

The center seat belt connector tongue can be

attached only into the rear center seat belt con-

nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat

belts” earlier in this section.

WARNING

●Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

●When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the seat-

backs are completely secured in the

latched position and the rear center

seat belt connector is completely

secured.

●If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured in

the correct position, serious personal

injury may result in an accident or sud-

den stop. Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. To

adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊

1and

move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired

position 䊊

2, so the belt passes over the center of

the shoulder. The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-

der belt anchor into position.

LRS0242

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available that can be

purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in

(200 mm) of length and may be used for either

the driver or front passenger seating position.

See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-

chasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraint

●Forward-facing child restraint

●Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal

injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-

tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-

straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat

belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-

formation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”

later in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over one year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions for minimum and maximum weight

and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-

mends that small children be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a child

restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat belts

which are provided. The seat belt may not fit

properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5

cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and

80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to

obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the shoul-

der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap

portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-

men. The booster seat should raise the child so

that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the top, middle portion of the shoulder

and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat

can only be used in seating positions that have a

three-point type seat belt. The booster seat

should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so

the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face

and neck, use the shoulder belt without the

booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the cargo

area. The child could be seriously injured

or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, see

“Forward-facing child restraint in-

stallation using the seat belts” later

in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand loads from child

restraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and children of various sizes. When se-

lecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child

restraints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible

child restraints. This system may also be referred

to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.

With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle

seat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

LRS0724

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of

child restraints could result in serious in-

jury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using

the LATCH lower anchors. The child

restraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower an-

chors are obstructed.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Top

tether anchor” for installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the top

tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo

so it does not contact the top tether strap.

Cargo that is not properly secured or

cargo that contacts the top tether strap

may damage it during a collision. A child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points 䊊

1are located on the rear parcel

shelf.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662 LRS0723

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch (25

mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is

not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment

as necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint or try installing by

using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).

Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

●The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front passenger

air bag and status light” later in this

section.

●When installing a child restraint system

in the rear center position, both the

center seat belt connector tongue and

buckle tongue must be secured. See

“Attaching the rear center seat belt” in

this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0669

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0670

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

WRS0763

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this

section. Do not install child restraints that

require the use of a top tether strap in seat-

ing positions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest

to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest

when the child restraint is removed.

See “Adjustable headrest” in this section for

headrest adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable headrest and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-

ing position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2

WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch (25

mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is

not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment

as necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the opera-

tion of the front passenger air bag. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section.

When installing a child restraint system in

the rear center position, both the center

seat belt connector tongue and buckle

tongue must be secured. See “Attaching

the rear center seat belt” in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there-

fore, must not be used in the front seat.

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-

straint or headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest

is removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint or

headrest when the child restraint is

removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-

able headrest” in this section for head re-

straint or headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper child restraint

fit, try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). See “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do

not install child restraints that require the use

of a top tether strap in seating positions that

do not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light or should illumi-

nate. If this light is not illuminated see, ⬙Front

passenger air bag and status light⬙in this

section. Move the child restraint to an-

other seating position. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

Forward-facing – step 10 (Type A)

LRS0351

Forward-facing — step 10 (Type B)

LRS0316

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)

or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover 䊊

1from the anchor

point which is located directly behind the

child seat.

2. If necessary, raise or remove the headrest to

position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback. If the headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the headrest when the child restraint is re-

moved. See “Adjustable headrest” in

this section for headrest adjustment,

removal and installation information.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-

stallation procedure steps in this section

before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your NISSAN

dealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured

in a sudden stop or collision greatly

increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0723

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat 䊊

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat 䊊

2should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with the

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the

Automatic Locking Retractor mode when

using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”

sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-

straint or headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head restraint or head-

rest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint or

headrest when the booster seat is re-

moved. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-

able headrest” in this section for head re-

straint or headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

WRS0699

Front passenger position

LRS0454

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light or may or may not

illuminate, depending on the size of the child

and the type of booster seat being used. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section.

Type A

LRS0351

Type B

LRS0316

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the following systems:

●Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic

area of the driver and front passenger in certain

side impact collisions. The side air bags are de-

signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in front and rear outboard seating positions

in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection pro-

vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the occu-

pant seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-

ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for

instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front

air bags inflate with great force. Even

with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

Advanced Air Bag System monitors the

severity of a collision and seat belt us-

age then inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) that turns the front

passenger air bag OFF under some

conditions. This sensor is only used in

this seat. Failure to be properly seated

and wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and

status light” later in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

WRS0031

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating front air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill your child. See “Child re-

straints” earlier in this section for

details.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact supplemental air bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256 SSS0101

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat with both feet on the floor. The

side air bag and curtain air bag inflate

with great force. Do not allow anyone to

place their hand, leg or face near the

side air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window or

lean against the door. Some examples

of dangerous riding positions are

shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

SSS0188 WRS0032

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0159 SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bags

2. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

3. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

4. Crash zone sensor

5. Air Bag Control Unit (ACU)

6. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor)

7. Pretensioner

8. Side satellite sensor

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.

The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may in-

LRS0725

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

flate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper front air bag system opera-

tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual

stage inflators. It also monitors information from

the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit

(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-

sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-

ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and seat belt

usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it

additionally monitors the weight of an occupant

or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based

on information from the sensors, only one front air

bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the

crash severity and whether the front occupants

are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front

passenger air bag may be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions, depending on the

weight detected on the passenger seat and how

the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be

illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will

not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section for further details. One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper performance

of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN

dealer. If you are considering modification of your

vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-

senger seated upright as far as practical away

from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The

front air bags inflate quickly in order to help

protect the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can increase the

risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is

against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-

tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some con-

ditions. Read this section carefully to

learn how it operates. Proper use of the

seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-

essary for most effective protection. Fail-

ure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat

belts and child restraints can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light

or is located near the climate controls. The

light operates as follows:

●Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The

or is OFF and the front passenger air

bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

●Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The or illuminates to

indicate that the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-

tion: The light or is OFF to in-

dicate that the front passenger air bag is

operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used

to meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classification

sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the

front passenger seat cushion and is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat by

weight. It works together with seat belt sensors

described later. For example, if a child is in the

front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag

OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a

child restraint of the type specified in the regula-

Type A

LRS0351

Type B

LRS0316

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s

weight can be detected and cause the air bag to

turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-

tion can vary depending on the front passenger

seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-

signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the

amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when

it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). Based on the

weight on the seat detected by the occupant

classification sensor and the belt tension de-

tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag

System determines whether the front passenger

air bag should be automatically turned OFF as

required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the passen-

ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For

small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the

occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-

ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting

on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out

of position), this could cause the sensor to turn

the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant

improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode

(child restraint mode), this could cause the air

bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be

seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the

most effective protection by the seat belt and

supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensor and seat belt sensors are

designed to operate as described above to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF for specified

child restraints as required by the regulations.

Failing to properly secure child restraints and to

use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may

allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or

sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section

for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-

tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front pas-

senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-

ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating

that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may not

be illuminated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that

the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

that the child restraint or seat belt is not being

used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is

installed properly, the seat belt is used properly

and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-

minate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. For example, if a

large adult who is sitting in the front passenger

seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag

status light will go from OFF to ON for a few

seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system

operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steering

wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-

jects may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classifica-

tion sensor (pressure sensor).

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring should not be

modified or disconnected. Unautho-

rized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on

the air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield could

affect the function of the supplemental

air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-

ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags

are located in the side roof rails. These systems

are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help

reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-

pants. However, all of the information, cau-

tions and warnings in this manual still ap-

ply and must be followed. The side air bags

and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity side impact.

They are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-

tain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-

sitions. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag

and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other

injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

LRS0259

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the front and rear

outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of

the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, these air bag modules

during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air

bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in the

ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to or

accidental inflation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag or damage to the

side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

●Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around

the side air bag.

●Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation

of electrical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-

ing harnesses* should not be modified

or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat belts with pretensioners (front

seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioners cannot be reused af-

ter activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but a pretensioner is

not activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if nec-

essary, replaced by your NISSAN

dealer.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioners. Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

●Work around and on the pretensioner

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

●If you need to dispose of a pretensioner

or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunction

with the front air bag system. Working with the

seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner is encased within the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same way

as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow

the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to

reduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-

tem, the supplemental air bag warning

light will not come on, will flash intermit-

tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on

after the ignition switch has been placed in the

ON or START position. In this case, the preten-

sioner system may not function properly. It must

be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the

nearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning Labels

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact

air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner

systems. The monitored circuits include the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-

ellite sensors, occupant classification system,

front air bag modules, side air bag modules,

curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all

related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may

not operate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an ac-

cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

WRS0897 LRS0100

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

Repair and replacement of these supplemental

air bag systems should be done only by a

NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags, pretensioners and related parts should be

pointed out to the person performing the mainte-

nance. The ignition switch should always be

placed in the LOCK position when working under

the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, if any of

the front air bags inflate, the activated

pretensioner must also be replaced.

The air bag module and pretensioner

should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.

The air bag module and pretensioner

cannot be repaired.

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to

the front end or side portion of the

vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner systems

or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Trip computer (if so equipped) ...................2-4

Tachometer ....................................2-5

g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped) ...........2-6

Fuel gauge ....................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-7

Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) ........2-7

Outside temperature display (if so equipped) ......2-8

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders .......2-9

Checking bulbs ...............................2-10

Warning lights ................................2-10

Indicator lights ................................2-14

Audible reminders .............................2-16

Security systems .................................2-17

Vehicle security system (if so equipped)..........2-17

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-19

Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-20

Switch operation ..............................2-20

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch ..................................2-21

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-22

Headlight control switch........................2-22

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-23

Instrument brightness control ...................2-23

Turn signal switch .............................2-24

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch .....................2-24

Horn ............................................2-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-25

Heated seat (if so equipped).......................2-26

Power outlet .....................................2-26

Storage .........................................2-27

Map pockets..................................2-27

Storage bin ...................................2-28

Storage trays .................................2-28

Instrument panel storage (if so equipped) ........2-28

Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ..............2-29

Cup holders ..................................2-30

Glove box ....................................2-31

Console box ..................................2-31

Trunk divider (if so equipped) ...................2-31

Cargo net (if so equipped)......................2-32

Grocery hooks (if so equipped) .................2-33

Windows ........................................2-34

Power windows (if so equipped) ................2-34

Manual windows (if so equipped)................2-37

Moonroof (if so equipped) .........................2-37

Electric moonroof..............................2-37

Interior light ......................................2-39

Map lights (if so equipped) ........................2-40

Trunk light .......................................2-41

1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)

/turn signal switch (P. 2-22); Manual

shift paddles (if so equipped) (P.5-15)

2. Steering wheel switch for audio control

and Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone

System (if so equipped) (P. 4-60, 4-62)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn

(P. 1-43, 2-25)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-23)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-20)

8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-27)

9. Audio system (P. 4-31, 4-34, 4-38)

10. Center ventilator (P. 4-14)

11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-43)

12. Side ventilator (P. 4-14)

13. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)

14. Engine oil pressure gauge

(if so equipped) (P. 2-7)

15. g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped)

(P. 2-6)

16. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24)

17. Hazard warning flasher switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-24); Manual shift

mode switch (if so equipped) (P.5-15)

18. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-44)

19. Glove box (P. 2-31)

20. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-43)

21. Climate control (P. 4-14)

22. Shift selector (P. 5-12)

23. Power outlet (P. 2-26)

24. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)

WIC1600

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

25. Tilt steering (P.3-27)

26. Storage bin (P. 2-28)

27. Hood release lever (P. 3-23)

28 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) (P.2-16)

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

1. Tachometer

2. Fuel gauge/odometer/transmission

position indicator/engine coolant tem-

perature gauge/Instrument brightness

level/trip computer (if so equipped)

3. Speedometer

4. Instrument brightness control/change

button for twin trip odometer/change

button for trip computer

(if so equipped)

LIC1014

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

To switch between the odometer and the twin trip

odometers press the instrument brightness

control/change button.

Changing the display

Push the instrument brightness control/change

button to change the display as follows:

With twin trip odometer:

Odometer →Trip A →Trip B →Odometer

With trip computer:

Odometer →Trip A →Trip B →DTE →Instant

Fuel Economy →Average Fuel Economy →Av-

erage Speed →Journey time →Odometer

Resetting the trip odometer

Push the instrument brightness control/change

button for more than 1 second to reset the cur-

rently displayed trip odometer to zero.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the trip computer change

button on the instrument panel located near the

speedometer. The following modes can be se-

lected in the display:

●Distance to empty

●Instant fuel economy

●Average fuel consumption

●Average speed

●Journey time

LIC1015 WIC1508

2-4 Instruments and controls

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-

ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the

fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

NOTE:

When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momen-

tarily change the display.

Instant fuel economy

The instant fuel economy mode shows the instant

fuel consumption. The display updates instantly

when driving.

Average fuel consumption (Mpg or

l/100km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pressing the change button

for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-

play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the

first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display

shows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h)

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done

by pressing the trip or change button for more

than approximately 1 second. The display is up-

dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds

after a reset, the display shows (----).

Journey time

The journey time mode shows the time since the

last reset. The displayed time can be reset by

pressing the change button for more than ap-

proximately 1 second.

Trip computer reset

Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-

onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-

tance to empty (dte).

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine

into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-

gine speed. Operating the engine in the

red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

LIC1021

Instruments and controls 2-5

g (gravity)-FORCE GAUGE (if so

equipped)

This gauge shows the straight-line acceleration

and deceleration g-forces while you are driving.

NOTE:

The g-force gauge does not indicate cor-

nering g-forces.

FUEL GAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in the

ON position for the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as

possible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, see “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in

this section.

LIC1113 LIC1529

2-6 Instruments and controls

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in the

ON position for the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the reading is within the zone

䊊

Ashown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates a coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

the temperature. If the gauge is over the

normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In

case of emergency” section for immediate

action required

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if

so equipped)

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-

tem oil pressure while the engine is running.

When the engine speed is high, the engine oil

pressure is also high. When the engine speed is

low, the gauge indicates lower oil pressure.

Engine oil pressure also changes based on en-

gine temperature. The oil pressure will be higher

when the engine is cold and lower when the

engine is warm.

LIC1530 LIC1114

Instruments and controls 2-7

CAUTION

●This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

●If the gauge needle does not move with

the proper amount of engine oil, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer. Continued vehicle operation in

such a condition could cause serious

damage to the engine.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

(if so equipped)

The outside temperature function provides a dis-

play of the outside temperature when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

The display of positive temperatures is unsigned

(blank), negative temperatures are prefixed with a

minus sign.

2-8 Instruments and controls

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light (if so equipped)

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light (if so

equipped)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light P position selecting warning light (CVT mod-

els) (if so equipped)

Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Electric power steering warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-

sition indicator light (CVT models)

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light (if so

equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator

light (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped) or Front passenger air bag status

light

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so

equipped)

High beam indicator light (blue)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-9

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on:

or , , , , ,

If equipped, the following lights come on briefly

and then go off:

or , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate

an open circuit in the electrical system.

Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light illuminates and then turns off. This

indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See

⬙Brake system⬙in the ⬙Starting and driving⬙sec-

tion.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running

with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) waning light illuminate, it may indicate the

2-10 Instruments and controls

ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a

NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-

ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN

dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not

closed securely while the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Electric power steering

warning light

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light illumi-

nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-

ing warning light turns off. This indicates the

power steering system is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminates

while the engine is running, it may indicate the

power steering system is not functioning properly

and may need servicing. Have the power steering

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the power steering warning light illumi-

nates with the engine running, there will be no

power assist for the steering but you will still have

control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steer-

ing effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

See “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving”

section.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

Instruments and controls 2-11

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E

(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel

in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches E

(Empty), showing no more fuel bars.

Low tire pressure warning light

(if so equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-

justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-

sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”

section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

●If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury. Check

the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening to turn the

low tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still comes on while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-

place it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

2-12 Instruments and controls

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluid

warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-washer

fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid

as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™

warning light (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key warning light illuminates green

when the ignition switch can be turned. The

Intelligent Key warning light illuminates red when

the ignition switch cannot be turned.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks red if the

Intelligent Key is taken outside of the vehicle

while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

ON position.

●If the Intelligent Key warning light blinks,

make sure of the location of the Intelligent

Key as soon as possible. The Intelligent Key

should be carried by the driver while operat-

ing the vehicle.

●The Intelligent Key warning light turns off

about 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key is

brought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks green

indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged.

See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped)”

in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion.

P position selecting warning

light (CVT models) (if so

equipped)

The light blinks red and the warning buzzer

sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with the

Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but the shift

selector is not in the P (Park) position.

When the warning light blinks, place the ignition

switch in the ON position, move the shift selector

to the P position, then place the ignition switch in

the LOCK position.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the ON or START

position and remains illuminated until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-

sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle

must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioners may not function properly. For addi-

tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-

tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag systems

and/or pretensioner systems will not op-

erate in an accident. To help avoid injury

to yourself or others, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) position

indicator light (CVT models)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this indicator light shows the shift selec-

tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the cruise control system. If the light

blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate

the cruise control system is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

or Front passenger air

bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light (

or ) will be lit and the passenger front air

bag will be OFF depending on how the front

passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,

see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in

the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

2-14 Instruments and controls

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come

on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make

sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons

(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when

the engine is not running, it indicates that the

vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-

tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-

ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in

one of two ways:

●Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The light should turn off after

a few driving trips. If the light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to

the dealer.

●Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system. To re-

duce or avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking

and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected

by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light

(CVT models)

The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when

the overdrive off mode is selected.

For additional information, see “Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light

blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks

when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position with the key removed from the ignition

switch.

The blinking security indicator light indicates that

the security systems equipped on the vehicle are

operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-

tems” later in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-

nates when the side light or headlight position is

selected. See “Headlight and turn signal switch”

later in this section for further details.

Slip indicator light (if so

equipped)

This indicator will blink when the VDC system is

operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that

the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is

nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is

normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the

VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on when

you place the ignition switch in the ON position.

The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-

onds if the system is operational. If the light does

not come on have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light (if so

equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle

Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.

This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys-

tem is not operating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch

again or restart the engine and the system will

operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the ON

position. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-

onds if the system is operational. If the light stays

on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light

while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic

Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear

the system working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened

while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove

the key and take it with you when leaving the

vehicle.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-

tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is

opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer

(if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one

of the following improper operations is found.

●The ignition switch is not returned to the

LOCK position when locking the doors.

●The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors.

●The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-

hicle when operating the vehicle.

●Any doors are not closed securely when

locking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both

the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “NISSAN

Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the

vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking

brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to

zero.

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-

tems:

●Vehicle security system (if so equipped)

●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors

when the system is armed. It is not, however, a

motion detection type system that activates when

a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-17

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with:

●the power door lock switch (if the door is

opened, locked and then closed).

●the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-

gent Key models).

●any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-

els).

●the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:

●Push the button. All doors lock.

The hazard lights flash twice and the horn

beeps once to indicate all doors are

locked.

●When the button is pushed with

all doors locked, the hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-

minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to

“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes

on. The light stays on for about 30

seconds. The vehicle security system is now

pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-

hicle security system automatically shifts

into the armed phase. The light begins

to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the

30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s

door is unlocked by the key, a request

switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON

position, the system will not arm.

●If the key is turned slowly when locking

the driver’s door, the system may not

arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned

beyond the vertical position toward the

unlock position to remove the key, the

system may be disarmed when the key

is removed. If the indicator light fails to

glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door

once and lock it again.

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

arm with all doors closed and locked

with the ignition switch placed in the

OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

2-18 Instruments and controls

●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking

the driver’s door with the key, a request

switch or by pressing the button on

the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

●opening a door without using the key, a

request switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key

(even if the door is unlocked by using the

inside lock knob or the power door lock

switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s

door with the key, pressing the button on

the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all

doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key

models).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON

position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately 10

seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC

Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT

ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD

VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-

ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Security indicator light

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light

blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks

when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position with the key removed from the ignition

switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have when visiting

your NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster).

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

LIC0474 WIC0854

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

2-20 Instruments and controls

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep opera-

tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir tank with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windsheild-washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir tank.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir tank. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir tank

to mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and

push the rear window defroster switch on. The

rear window defroster indicator light on the

switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

LIC0720

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-21

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights come on.

䊊

2When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the headlights come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, push the

lever forward. The high beam lights come on

and the light illuminates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

while the headlight switch is in the

or position, the headlights will turn off after

5 minutes.

Type A

LIC0706

Type B

LIC0688 WIC0859

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-22 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-

duced intensity when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The daytime running

lights operate with the headlight switch in the

OFF position or in the position. Turn the

headlight switch to the position for full

illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control operates when

the headlight control switch is in the

or position and the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The brightness level will be shown briefly in the

meter’s display area whenever the control is op-

erated.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-

ment panel lights when driving at night. When

the maximum or minimum intensity is met,

a short chime will sound.

WIC1294

Instruments and controls 2-23

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2To signal a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where the indicator light

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then turn the fog light

switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch

to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

WIC0860 WIC0861 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

2-24 Instruments and controls

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

placed in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To sound the horn, push the top portion of the

steering wheel’s center pad.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-

ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and

driving” section.

WIC1324 WIC0534

HORN VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-25

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch,

as desired, depending on the temperature.

The indicator light in the switch will illumi-

nate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

CAUTION

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked

by your NISSAN dealer.

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones. They

are rated at 12 Volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlet located on the bottom center

portion of the instrument panel is powered di-

rectly by the vehicle’s battery. The power outlet

located in the console (if so equipped) is pow-

ered only when the ignition switch is placed in the

ACC or ON position.

WIC1441

Instrument panel

LIC1022

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped) POWER OUTLET

2-26 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●The power outlets are not designed for

use with a cigarette lighter.

●Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water to contact the

outlet.

MAP POCKETS

Console (if so equipped)

LIC1478 LIC1023

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-27

STORAGE BIN

Pull the lid down to open the storage bin.

Some models are equipped with a soft lining in

the storage bin for storing sunglasses.

WARNING

Keep the storage bin closed while driving

to prevent an accident.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to

help prevent injury in an accident or sud-

den stop.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE (if

so equipped)

To open the storage tray, push and release. The

storage tray will automatically move to the open

position.

LIC1025 WIC1036

LIC1024

2-28 Instruments and controls

●The inside of the storage tray can get hot. Do

not place objects inside which can melt or

be easily deformed.

WARNING

Keep the tray lid closed while driving to

help prevent contents from becoming pro-

jectiles causing injury in an accident or

during a sudden stop.

SEATBACK POCKETS (if so

equipped)

The seatback pockets are located on the back of

the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets

can be used to store maps.

Type A

LIC1116

Type B

LIC1328

Instruments and controls 2-29

CUP HOLDERS

Adjust the cup holder size by turning the adjust-

ment knob and sliding the cup holder divider to

the desired position.

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Lower the rear center armrest to access the cup

holders.

Front

WIC1531

Rear (if so equipped)

WIC1097

2-30 Instruments and controls

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊

and raise the lid 䊊

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

TRUNK DIVIDER (if so equipped)

CAUTION

The trunk divider does not contain any

secure locking mechanisms so it should

not be used as a secure storage for

valuables.

The trunk divider allows for the creation of a

hidden storage compartment in the trunk or when

lowered, a temporary storage surface for wet

items.

The trunk divider can be accessed through the

lowering of the rear seats or through the trunk.

WIC1487 WIC1504

Instruments and controls 2-31

Once the rear seats have been lowered, the trunk

divider can be opened by pressing down on the

securing latch and pushing the divider toward the

rear of the vehicle. For more information on the

lowering of rear seats, see “Interior trunk access”

in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section of this manual.

Access the trunk divider by opening the trunk. To

remove the trunk divider, press down on securing

latch 䊊

1and lower the trunk divider to about 45°.

Pull and lift the divider out of the holding brackets

䊊

2to remove from the trunk.

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

●Be sure to secure all four hooks into the

retainers. The cargo restrained in the

net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or

the net may not stay secured.

Accessing through rear seats

LIC1030

Accessing through trunk

LIC1031 WIC1032

2-32 Instruments and controls

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo

area from moving around while the vehicle is in

motion.

To install the cargo net, attach the net to the

retainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the

cargo net retainers.

GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)

The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and

can be used to hang a standard size plastic

grocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 20

lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

LIC0802 LIC0748

Instruments and controls 2-33

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch

to prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls and become

trapped in a window. Unattended chil-

dren could become involved in serious

accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or for about

45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s

door is opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger’s side window switch

4. Right rear passenger’s window switch

5. Left rear passenger’s window switch

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close the front and rear

passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the first

detent and continue to hold it down until the

desired window position is reached. To close a

window, pull the switch to the first detent and

continue to hold up until the desired window

position is reached.

WIC1100

WINDOWS

2-34 Instruments and controls

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window, push the switch to the first detent

and continue to hold it down until the desired

window position is reached 䊊

1. To close the

window, pull the switch to the first detent and

continue to hold it up until the desired window

position is reached 䊊

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding windows. To open the

window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊

1.To

close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only

the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic

operation, pull the switch up to the second detent

and release it; it need not be held. The window

automatically closes all the way. To stop the win-

dow, press the switch down while the window is

closing.

WIC1129 LIC0718 LIC0410

Instruments and controls 2-35

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,

or jump started, the power window auto-reverse

function may not operate properly. If this occurs,

please contact the dealer to re-initialize the

power window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window equipped with automatic operation as it

is closing, the window will be immediately low-

ered.

When the automatic operation for the

driver’s power window switch does

not operate

If the automatic operation for the driver’s power

window switch does not operate properly, per-

form the following procedure to initialize the

power window switch.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Press and hold the driver’s window switch

down until the window opens completely.

3. Release the switch.

4. Pull and hold the driver’s window switch up

to the second detent until the window glass

has reached the full close position. Con-

tinue to hold the window switch in the

up position for 5 seconds after the win-

dow glass has reached the full close

position. (It is necessary for this entire step

to be completed with one continuous pull of

the window switch.)

5. Release the switch.

Initialization is now complete. The automatic op-

eration for the driver’s power window switch

should now operate.

If the automatic operation does not operate prop-

erly after performing the above procedure, see a

NISSAN dealer for assistance.

No initialization is required for all the other win-

dow switches.

2-36 Instruments and controls

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)

The side windows can be opened or closed by

turning the hand crank on each door.

ELECTRIC MOONROOF

This moonroof only operates with the ignition

switch placed in the ON position.

NOTE:

If the battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, the moonroof may not operate cor-

rectly, and must be reset.

See “Resetting the moonroof switch” later in this

section.

Sliding the moonroof

To open the moonroof, push and hold the switch

toward DOWN/OPEN. The moonroof will stop

when the switch is released or when the moon-

roof is fully open.

To close the moonroof, push and hold the switch

toward UP/CLOSE. The moonroof will stop when

the switch is released or when the moonroof is

fully closed.

Tilting the moonroof

Close the moonroof by pushing and holding the

switch toward UP/CLOSE. Release the switch,

then push and hold the UP/CLOSE switch to tilt

the moonroof up. The moonroof will stop when

the switch is released or when the moonroof

reaches the maximum tilt position.

To tilt the moonroof down, push and hold the

switch toward DOWN/OPEN. The moonroof will

stop when the switch is released or when the

moonroof is fully closed.

WIC0263 WIC1482

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-37

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the moonroof opening while the vehicle

is in motion or while the moonroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Resetting the moonroof switch

The moonroof switch may not operate properly

and may need to be reset if any of the following

conditions have occurred:

●the battery terminal has been disconnected,

●the moonroof has been manually moved,

●the moonroof motor has been removed and

reinstalled after the moonroof has been re-

positioned or adjusted,

●the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted

or changed, or

●the electrical supply interrupted and/or

some malfunction has been detected.

Use the following reset procedure to return

moonroof operation to normal.

1. Press the UP/CLOSE side of the moonroof

switch, until it stops and then release the

switch.

2. Push and hold the UP/CLOSE side of the

moonroof switch. The moonroof panel will

begin to move in about 10 seconds.

3. Continue to hold the UP/CLOSE side of the

moonroof switch while the panel moves in a

jogging motion to the full tilt position. When

the panel reaches the full tilt position it will

back up a little and stop.

4. Release the UP/CLOSE side of the moon-

roof switch.

5. Within 5 seconds of completing step 4,

press and continuously hold the UP/CLOSE

side of the moonroof switch. After a delay of

5 seconds, the panel will move from the tilt

position to the open position and back to the

close position.

6. Release the UP/CLOSE side of the moon-

roof switch. Do not disconnect the power for

at least 2 seconds. The moonroof is now

restarted.

NOTE:

If the UP/CLOSE side of the moonroof

switch is released anytime during the re-

starting process, all learned profile data

will be discarded and the procedure will

have to be started over.

If the moonroof still does not operate properly,

have the moonroof system checked, and if nec-

essary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or

tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

2-38 Instruments and controls

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof

will immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-

mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-

peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens; the moonroof will fully close

gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the

moonroof.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the moonroof opening while the vehicle

is in motion or while the moonroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-

ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the

moonroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch and

operates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

1, the

interior light illuminates, regardless of door posi-

tion.

When the switch is in the center O position, the

interior light illuminates by opening a door.

The interior light will stay on for about 30 seconds

when:

●The doors are unlocked while the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position and all

doors are closed.

WIC0264

INTERIOR LIGHT

Instruments and controls 2-39

●The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while all doors are closed.

The interior light will turn off while the 30 second

timer is activated when:

●The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a

key or the lock-unlock switch.

●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

2, the

interior light does not illuminate, regardless of

door position.

Some vehicles are equipped with a battery saver

feature that will automatically turn off the interior

lights after approximately 10 minutes if:

●doors are open, or

●the interior light switch is in the ON position.

NOTE:

If the interior lights are turned off automati-

cally by the battery saver feature, the igni-

tion switch must be placed in the ON posi-

tion before the interior lights will illuminate

again.

For information regarding the interior light bulb

replacement, refer to “Exterior and interior lights”

in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of

this manual.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery. To turn the map lights on, press the button. To

turn them off, press the button again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

WIC1540

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)

2-40 Instruments and controls

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.

When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-

rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TRUNK LIGHT

Instruments and controls 2-41

MEMO

2-42 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) .........3-3

Doors ............................................3-4

Locking with key................................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob . ...................3-5

Locking with power door lock switch .............3-6

Automatic door locks . . .........................3-6

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-7

Remote keyless entry system (models without

NISSAN Intelligent Key™) (if so equipped)............3-7

How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-8

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) ...........3-11

Operating range...............................3-13

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................3-13

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation..............3-14

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ......................................3-17

Warning lights and audible reminders ............3-20

Warning signals ...............................3-21

Troubleshooting guide .........................3-22

Hood ...........................................3-23

Trunk lid .........................................3-23

Trunk lid release ...............................3-24

Key operation (if so equipped) ..................3-24

Interior trunk lid release ........................3-24

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-25

Opener operation..............................3-25

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-25

Steering wheel ...................................3-27

Tilt operation..................................3-27

Sun visors .......................................3-27

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped)...................3-27

Mirrors ..........................................3-28

Rearview mirror ...............................3-28

Outside mirrors ...............................3-28

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-

der chip and chrome NISSAN brand

symbol on one side

2. Transponder chip

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by

using the key number. NISSAN does not record

key numbers so it is very important to keep track

of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer

can duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.

These keys have a transponder chip in the key

head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-

cate your existing key. As many as 5 NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used

with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to

your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase the

memory of all key codes previously registered

into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

After the registration process, these components

will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time

of registration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which

contains an electrical transponder, to come into

contact with salt water. This could affect system

function.

LPD0348

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Two Intelligent Keys

2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)

3. Key number plate

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so

equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be

registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with

the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-

lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra-

tion process requires erasing all memory in the

Intelligent Key components when registering new

keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you

have to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code

of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

This may prevent the unauthorized use of

the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.

For information regarding the erasing

procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

WPD0363

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,

which can be used in case of a discharged bat-

tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation in

the same way as an ordinary key.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key slot.

See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the

“Instruments and Controls” section of this

manual.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors can not be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

●Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts,

this provides greater safety in the event

of an accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from the

vehicle. This also helps keep children

and others from unintentionally open-

ing the doors, and will help keep out

intruders.

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

SPA1951

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH KEY

Manual (if so equipped)

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the

vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear

䊊

Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral 䊊

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks

all doors 䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position 䊊

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

Driver’s side

LPD0349 LPD0483

Inside lock

WPD0291

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to

the lock position 䊊

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s or

front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock

position with the key in the ignition switch and any

door open, all doors will lock and then unlock

automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from

being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the OFF position

(models with Intelligent Key system) or when

the key is removed from the ignition switch

(models without Intelligent Key system).

The automatic unlock function can be de-

activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-

vate the automatic door unlock system, perform

the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,

push and hold the power door lock switch to

the position (UNLOCK) for more than

5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will

flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard

indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each

setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac-

tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position (models with

Intelligent Key system) or when the key is re-

moved from the ignition switch (models without

Intelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu-

ally, use the inside lock knob or the power door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).

Door lock switch

WPD0381

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊

1, the

door can be opened from the outside or the

inside.

When the lever is in the lock position 䊊

the door can be opened only from the out-

side.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-

mits radio waves when the buttons are

pressed. The FAA advises radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

remote keyless entry keyfob while on

an airplane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the

interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by

using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle

before locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective

distance depends on the conditions around the

vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

●the battery is discharged

●the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the keyfob:

●Do not allow the keyfob, which contains

electrical components, to come into

contact with water or salt water. This

could affect the system function.

●Do not drop the keyfob.

●Do not strike the keyfob sharply against

another object.

●Do not change or modify the keyfob.

●Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the

keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

LIC0716

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(models without NISSAN Intelligent

Key™) (if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

●Do not place the keyfob for an extended

period in an area where temperatures

exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the keyfob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the keyfob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and per-

sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that key-

fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-

authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For

information regarding the erasing proce-

dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood, trunk lid, and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. All

the doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice

and the horn beeps once to indicate all

doors are locked.

●When the button is pressed with all

doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice

and the horn beeps once as a reminder that

the doors are already locked.

●If a door is open and you press the

button, the doors will lock but the horn will

not beep and the hazard lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to

“Silencing the horn beep feature” in this section

for details.

LPD0209

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

●Only the driver’s door unlocks.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed with the ignition

switch in any position except the ON posi-

tion.

●The interior light turns on and the light timer

activates for 30 seconds when the switch is

in the center O position with the ignition

switch in any position except the ON posi-

tion.

Press the button on the keyfob again

within 5 seconds.

●All doors unlock.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-

ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the

ignition and turning it to the ON or START posi-

tion, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing

the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed,

all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute

unless one of the following operations is per-

formed:

●Any door is opened.

●A key is inserted into the ignition switch and

the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

Releasing the trunk lid (if so equipped)

Press the button on the keyfob for longer

than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk

release button on the keyfob will not operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

LPD0210 WPD0319

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Using the panic alarm (if so equipped)

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25

seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for 25 seconds, or

●any button is pressed on the keyfob.

Using the interior light

Press the button on the keyfob once to

turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior light”

in the “Instruments and controls” section in this

manual.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-

vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to

confirm that the horn beep feature has been

deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

LPD0211 LPD0262

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and communi-

cation systems. Do not operate the In-

telligent Key while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored for a

flight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks

using the remote controller function or pushing

the request switch on the vehicle without taking

the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating

environment and/or conditions may affect the

Intelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-

ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-

mental conditions may interfere with the opera-

tion of the Intelligent Key under the following

operating conditions:

●When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as

a TV tower, power station and broadcasting

station.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,

and CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-

ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink

green for about 30 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-

nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-

tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-

tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section.

For models with a steering wheel lock mecha-

nism: Because the steering wheel is locked elec-

trically, unlocking the steering wheel with the

ignition switch in the Lock position is impossible

when the vehicle battery is completely dis-

charged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impos-

sible even if the Intelligent key is inserted into the

Intelligent Key port. Pay special attention that the

vehicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. For information about

the purchase and use of additional Intelligent

Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may

not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the

request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

SPA2038 WPD0375

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you and then lock the

doors.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch within the range of opera-

tion.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion. (Remove the key if any key is in the

ignition switch.)

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch 䊊

while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the outside buzzer sounds twice.

WPD0376 WPD0377

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

●Doors lock with the door handle request

switch while a mechanical key is in the igni-

tion switch or the ignition switch is pushed

in.

●Doors lock with the door handle request

switch while the ignition switch is not in the

LOCK position.

●Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the me-

chanical key even if any door is open.

●Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key inside

the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-

other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operating

the door handles or the trunk opener

switch.

●When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

●The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection

is equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors

are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;

the lock will automatically unlock and the door

buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-

ating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or

your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the rear parcel shelf.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on or

under the spare tire area.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

WPD0369

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch 䊊

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the

outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch 䊊

again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the

doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning

the door handle to its original position will unlock

the door. If the door does not unlock after return-

ing the door handle, push the door handle re-

quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 60

seconds after pushing the request switch.

●Opening any door.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

●Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition

switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a maximum

of 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the

room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-

ing operations.

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote controller.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

WPD0377 WPD0369

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch 䊊

Afor

more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-

ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4

times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is

equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is

closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,

the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will

open.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless function of

the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function

can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away

from the vehicle. The operating distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-

tion under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

●When the doors or the trunk are open or not

closed securely.

●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

LPD0478 WPD0359

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure that the doors have been

securely locked by operating the door

handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 60 sec-

onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pressing the button.

●Opening any doors.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

●Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition

switch.

The interior light illuminates for a maximum of 30

seconds when a door is unlocked and the room

light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 30

seconds by performing one of the following op-

erations.

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote controller.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

WPD0360

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-

onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release

button will not operate when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25

seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for 25 seconds, or

●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

●Pushing the request switch on the driver or

passenger door with the Intelligent Key in

range of the door handle.

WPD0364 WPD0361

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-

vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to

confirm that the horn beep feature has been

deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

䊊

1P (Park) position selecting warning

light

䊊

2NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE

REMINDERS

The Intelligent Key is equipped with a function

that is designed to minimize improper operations

and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen.

The warning buzzer sounds and the warning light

illuminates when improper operations are de-

tected.

WPD0362 WPD0382

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warning

light illuminates, be sure to check both

the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on

in the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and

the Intelligent Key.

Audible reminder and warning when

locking the doors

When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside

and outside the vehicle, check for the following:

●The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position.

●The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-

hicle.

●The shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

Audible reminder and warning when

the engine stops

When the P position selecting warning light

() in the instrument panel blinks in red:

●Make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)

position.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

●Make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)

position and the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-

er’s door is opened, check the following:

●The shift selector is placed in the P (Park)

position and the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK position.

●The mechanical key is not inserted into the

ignition switch.

●The warning chime may stop when one of

the following is performed:

– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

– Removing the mechanical key.

– Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when the engine

starts

When the Intelligent Key system warning light

() blinks red and the outside buzzer

sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle.

Warning for low battery power

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-

ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink

green for about 30 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. This warning

is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent

Key will run down soon. Replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at a

NISSAN dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key from

being left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power door lock

switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of

the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will

warn you when the door is closed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the door handle request

switch The front door beep sounds for approxi-

mately 2 seconds. The doors cannot be locked. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle

and push the door handle request switch.

When closing the doors

The front door beep sounds for approxi-

mately 10 seconds. The ignition knob is not placed in the LOCK

position. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

The key warning light in the instrument

panel blinks in red and the front door warn-

ing beep sounds for approximately 3

seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The front door beep sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle

and close the door.

When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not in the LOCK

position, or the mechanical key is inserted

into the ignition switch.

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

Remove the mechanical key from the igni-

tion switch.

When stopping the engine The P (Park) position warning light in the

instrument panel blinks in red. The shift selector is not in the P (Park)

position. Make sure that the shift selector is in the P

(Park) position and place the ignition switch

in the LOCK position.

When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrument

panel blinks in green. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See

“Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.

When turning the ignition switch A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not placed in the

LOCK position. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key warning light in the in-

strument panel illuminates red. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. If the Intelligent Key warning light illumi-

nates red even while you are carrying the

Intelligent Key, the battery is completely

discharged. Replace the battery with a new

one. See “Battery replacement” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

1located

below the instrument panel until the hood

springs up slightly.

2. Locate the lever 䊊

2in between the hood and

grille and push the lever sideways with your

fingertips.

3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod 䊊

4and insert it into

the slot on the underside of the hood 䊊

When closing the hood, return the support rod to

its original position, lower the hood to approxi-

mately 12 inches (30 cm) above the latch and

release it. This allows proper engagement of the

hood latch.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

WARNING

●Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-

haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

●Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

WPD0383

HOOD TRUNK LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

TRUNK LID RELEASE

The trunk lid release is located on the floor to the

left of the driver’s seat. To open the trunk lid, pull

the trunk lid release.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid

down securely.

You can also open the trunk lid with the keyfob (if

so equipped) or Intelligent Key (if so equipped).

Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” or

“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in this section.

KEY OPERATION (if so equipped)

To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To

close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid

down securely.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from playing

and becoming locked in the trunk where

they could be seriously injured. Keep the

car locked, with the rear seatback and

trunk lid securely latched when not in use,

and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides

a means of escape for children and adults in the

event they become locked inside the trunk.

Driver’s side

WPD0390 WPD0384 WPD0385

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-

nated release handle until the lock releases and

push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is

made of a material that glows in the dark after a

brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-

ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor

to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-

filler door, push the release. To lock, close the

fuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the

cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn

the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are

heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊

1while

refueling.

LPD0386 LPD0387

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause the

malfunction indicator light to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

●Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the

fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten

the fuel-filler cap properly may cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate. If the light

illuminates because the fuel-filler cap

is loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer

●For additional information, see the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and Controls” section

in this manual.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever 䊊

1down and adjust the

steering wheel up or down 䊊

2to the desired

position.

Pull the lock lever up to lock the steering wheel in

place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

To block out glare from the front, swing down the

sun visor 䊊

To block glare from the side, disconnect the sun

visor from the center mount and swing it to the

side 䊊

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity

mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the

mirror cover is open.

LPD0388

SIC2872

LPD0389

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

REARVIEW MIRROR

The night position 䊊

1reduces glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

Manual control type (if so equipped)

The outside mirror can be moved in any direction

for a better rear view.

WPD0126 LPD0029

MIRRORS

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Electric control type (if so equipped)

The outside mirror remote control only operates

when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or left

mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by

moving the control lever.

Heated mirrors (Canada only) (if so

equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Push the

rear window defroster switch to activate the heat-

ing function. Push the switch again to deactivate,

or the heating function will automatically turn off

after approximately 15 minutes.

WPD0274

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,

audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-2

How to use the touch screen ....................4-3

How to use the back button .....................4-5

How to use the SETUP button ...................4-5

button...................................4-8

RearView Monitor (if so equipped)...................4-8

How to read the displayed lines ..................4-9

Difference between predicted and actual

distances ......................................4-9

Adjusting the screen

(models without Navigation System) .............4-12

Adjusting the screen

(models with Navigation System) ................4-12

Operating tips.................................4-13

Vents ...........................................4-14

Heater and air conditioner (manual).................4-14

Controls......................................4-16

Heater operation ..............................4-17

Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) ........4-18

Air flow charts.................................4-19

Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped) ............4-22

Audio system ....................................4-23

Radio ........................................4-23

FM radio reception ............................4-23

AM radio reception ............................4-23

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .........4-24

Audio operation precautions ....................4-24

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player

(Type A) (if so equipped) .......................4-31

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player

(Type B) (if so equipped) .......................4-34

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type A) (if so equipped) .................4-38

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type B) (if so equipped) .................4-44

USB interface (models without Navigation

System) (if so equipped) .......................4-50

USB interface (models with Navigation

System) ......................................4-52

iPod姞* Player Operation without Navigation

System (Type A) (if so equipped) ................4-54

iPod姞* Player Operation without Navigation

System (Type B) (if so equipped) ................4-55

iPod姞* Player Operation with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-57

CD care and cleaning..........................4-59

Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) ...............................4-60

Antenna ......................................4-61

Car phone or CB radio............................4-62

Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) ..................................4-62

Regulatory Information . ........................4-64

Using the system ..............................4-64

Control buttons ...............................4-66

Getting started ................................4-67

List of voice commands ........................4-69

Speaker adaptation (SA) mode..................4-73

Manual Control................................4-75

Troubleshooting guide . . . ......................4-76

WARNING

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from

it, stop using the system immediately

and contact your nearest NISSAN

dealer. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire or electrical

shock.

CAUTION

Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the sys-

tem may result in accident, fire or electric

shock.

1. (brightness control) button

2. Display screen

3. MAP button*

4. NAV button*

5. TRAF button*

6. SETUP button (P. 4-5)

7. BACK button

8. TUNE/SCROLL knob

LHA1474

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

9. Power button/Volume control knob

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown only on the display. These keys can be

selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH

SCREEN

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the liquid crystal

display may break if it is hit with a hard

or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do

not touch the liquid crystalline material,

which contains a small amount of mer-

cury. In case of contact with skin, wash

immediately with soap and water.

●To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-

not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-

ate the navigation system.

WARNING

●ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

●Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause

an accident.

Touch screen operation

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. For example, to select

the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key 䊊

1on the

screen.

LHA1476

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

Adjusting the item:

For screens where an item can be adjusted incre-

mentally, such as when adjusting the bass and

treble for the audio system, touch the “+” key 䊊

or the “⫺” key 䊊

2to adjust the settings of an item.

When there are more items than can be dis-

played on one screen, touch the up arrow 䊊

3to

scroll up the page or touch the down arrow 䊊

4to

scroll down the page.

Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a set

number of conditions. For example, the Display

Mode can be set to “Automatic”, “Day”or “Night”.

To adjust this type of item, touch the item 䊊

1. The

item will cycle through the available settings and

the red indicator lights to the left of the setting

condition 䊊

2will come on or turn off accordingly.

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter key 䊊

There are some options available when inputting

characters.

●123 / ABC:

Changes the available character set to num-

bers.

●Space:

Inserts a space.

●Delete:

Deletes the last inputted character with one

touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to

delete all of the characters.

LHA1477 LHA1478 LHA1479

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

●OK:

Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-

tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the

screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON

When the SETUP button is pressed, the Setup

screen will appear on the display. You can select

and/or adjust several functions, features and

modes that are available for your vehicle.

Audio setup

For audio setup, refer to “Audio System” in this

section.

Navigation setup

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

XM setup

For XM setup, refer to “Audio System” in this

section.

LHA1480

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

System setup

Select the “System” key to select and/or adjust

various functions of the system. A screen with

additional options will appear.

Display:

Select the “Display” key to adjust the appearance

of the display. The following settings can be

adjusted:

Brightness

The brightness of the display can be set to Very

Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very Dark. Touch

the “Brightness” key to cycle through the options.

Display Mode

The display can be adjusted to fit the level of

lighting in the vehicle. Touch the “Display Mode”

key to cycle through the options. “Day” and

“Night” modes are suited for the respective times

of day, while “Automatic” controls the display

automatically.

Scroll Direction

The direction that menus scroll can be adjusted.

Choose either “up” or “down”.

LHA1481 LHA1482

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Clock:

Select the “Clock” key to adjust the time and the

appearance of the clock on the display. The fol-

lowing settings can be adjusted:

Time Format

The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Use GPS Clock

When this setting is activated, the clock is set

and continually updated via the GPS used by the

Navigation System.

Set Clock Manually

When this setting is activated, the clock can be

set manually. Touch the “+”or “-” key to adjust the

hours and minutes up or down.

Daylight Savings Time

When this setting is activated, daylight savings

time is on. Touch the “Daylight Savings Time” key

to toggle the setting on or off.

Time Zone

Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language:

Select the “Language” key to adjust the language

used by the system. The language can be set to

English, Français or Español.

Touch click:

Select the “Touch Click” key to toggle the touch

click feature on or off. When activated, a click

sound will be heard every time a key on the

screen is touched.

LHA1483 LHA1484 LHA1485

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

Beep tones:

Select the “Beep Tones” key to toggle the beep

tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep

sound will be heard when a pop-up message

appears on the screen or a button on the unit

(such as the button) is pressed and held

for two seconds.

Reset all settings/memory:

Select the “Reset All Settings/Memory” key to

return all settings to default and to clear the

memory.

Traffic setup

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the button. Pressing the button again will

change the display to the day or the night display.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the

display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the button for more than

two seconds to turn the display off. Press the

button again to turn the display on.

When the shift selector is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the

view directly to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary ob-

jects to help avoid damaging the ve-

hicle. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or

on the ground.

●The RearView Monitor is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper back-

ing. Always turn and check that it is safe

to do so before backing up. Always

back up slowly.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because

a wide-angle lens is used.

●Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

●Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation.

●Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled beside the license plate light.

●When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-

function or cause damage resulting in a

fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.

Do not scratch the cover when cleaning

dirt or snow from the cover.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and

distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line 䊊

Aare displayed on the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distances to

objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-

cate distances from the back bumper line 䊊

Ain

the illustration.

䊊

11.5 ft (0.5 m) red

䊊

23 ft (1 m) yellow

䊊

37 ft (2 m) green

䊊

410 ft (3 m) green (models without Navigation

System only)

The vehicle clearance lines are wider than

the actual clearance.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Without Navigation System

LHA0437

With Navigation System

WHA1531

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is viewed in the monitor farther than it

appears.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

WHA1504 WHA1505

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it

appears.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

WHA1506

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN (models

without Navigation System)

To adjust the quality of the screen, press the

setting control knob on the audio system.

●To adjust the Brightness or Contrast, press

the setting control knob repeatedly until the

setting you wish to adjust is displayed. Use

the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the dis-

play to the desired level.

●Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of

the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN (models

with Navigation System)

To adjust the quality of the screen, perform the

following:

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Touch “System”.

3. Touch “Display”.

4. To adjust the brightness, touch the “Bright-

ness” key repeatedly to set the display to

Very Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very

Dark. Touch “Display Mode” to cycle be-

tween day, night and automatic display

modes.

Do not adjust the screen settings of the RearView

Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

LHA1272 LHA1480 LHA1482

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

OPERATING TIPS

●When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-

verse), the monitor screen automatically

changes to the RearView Monitor mode.

However, the radio can be heard.

●It may take some time until the RearView

Monitor is displayed after the shift selector

has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects

may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-

View Monitor screen is displayed com-

pletely. When the shift selector is returned to

a position other than R (Reverse), it may take

some time until the screen changes. Objects

on the screen may be distorted until they are

completely displayed.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display ob-

jects. This is not a malfunction.

●When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-

tor may differ somewhat from those of the

actual object.

●When the contrast of objects is low at night,

pressing the setting control knob or SETUP

button may not change the brightness.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night.

●If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the RearView Monitor may not display ob-

jects. Clean the camera.

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discolora-

tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent

and then wipe with a dry cloth.

●Do not damage the camera as the monitor

screen may be adversely affected.

●Do not use body wax on the camera window.

If body wax does get on the camera window,

wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-

ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-

senger’s side 䊊

1, and center 䊊

2ventilators by

moving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator as-

semblies.

Open or close the ventilators 䊊

1by using the dial.

Move the dial toward the to open the ven-

tilators or toward the to close them.

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

WHA0772

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual)

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. Fan control dial

2. Air recirculation button

3. Temperature control dial

4. Air flow control dial

5. Rear window defroster

Type A

WHA0470

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

1. Fan control dial

2. Air recirculation button

3. Temperature control dial

4. Air conditioner button

5. Air flow control dial

6. Rear window defroster

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and

controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select the

air flow outlets.

MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling

(air conditioning if so

equipped).

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

●

You can also select the middle position

between and or between

and .

●When the , or position is

selected, the air recirculation mode

cannot be turned on. This prevents the win-

dows from fogging.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust

the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the

temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase

the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

NOTE:

The air recirculation feature is available

only on those vehicles equipped with air

conditioning.

Type B

LHA0440

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

On position (Indicator light on):

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

●driving on a dusty road.

●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-

senger compartment.

●for maximum cooling when using the air con-

ditioner.

When the button is pressed, the air con-

ditioner automatically turns on and the indicator

illuminates. When the button is pressed

again, the air recirculation mode turns off, but the

air conditioner remains on.

Off position (Indicator light off):

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-

ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-

ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button (if so

equipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equipped

with an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired position and push the button to

turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light

comes on when the air conditioner is operating.

To turn off the air conditioner, push the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-

froster switch, see “Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost

outlets and outboard vents.

1. Push the button to the off position for

normal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center vents.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets

and outboard vents to defrost/defog the win-

dows.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to HI and the

temperature control lever to the full HOT

position.

●When the or position is se-

lected, the air conditioner automatically

turns on (however, the indicator light will not

illuminate). In this position, the A/C cannot

be turned off. When the air flow control dial

is turned to any position other than

or , the A/C light will illuminate (the

A/C will continue operating) and can be

turned off using the A/C button. This dehu-

midifies the air which helps defog the wind-

shield. The mode automatically turns

off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further improve

the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating

This mode directs air from the side, center and

the foot outlets.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-

shield.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●When the or position is se-

lected, the air conditioner automatically

turns on (however, the indicator light will not

illuminate). In this position, the A/C cannot

be turned off. When the air flow control dial

is turned to any position other than

or the A/C light will illuminate (the

A/C will continue operating) and can be

turned off using the A/C button. This dehu-

midifies the air which helps defog the wind-

shield. The mode automatically turns

off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further improve

the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield. This

improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if

so equipped)

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired position, and push in the button to

activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-

tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions

are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the MAX A/C

or position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

●For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, push the button to

the on position (indicator light on). Be sure

to return the button to the off position

for normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used

for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

When the or position is selected,

the air conditioner automatically turns on (how-

ever, the indicator light will not illuminate). In this

position, the A/C cannot be turned off. When the

air flow control is turned to any position other

than or the A/C light will illuminate

(the A/C will continue operating) and can be

turned off using the A/C button. This dehumidi-

fies the air which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-

partment to further improve the defogging perfor-

mance.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Operating tips

●Keep the windows and moonroof closed

while the air conditioner is in operation.

●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3

minutes with the windows open to vent hot

air from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-

ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

●The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes

at least once a month. This helps pre-

vent damage to the system due to lack

of lubrication.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

●If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. See “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial

positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,

cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation

button should always be in the OFF posi-

tion for heating and defrosting.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

WHA1116 WHA1117

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WHA1118 WHA1119

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-

mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper equipment.

WHA1121

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if so

equipped)

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the POWER/VOLUME con-

trol knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the

radio with the engine not running, the ignition

switch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM

having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-

nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM

station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between the

transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-

of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect

off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter), static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or

large building for satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available when the

RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an XM姞satellite radio

service subscription is active. Satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

player.

●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

LHA0099

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After

a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)

CD).

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA (if

so equipped)

Terms:

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the

file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant and

irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, encoding bit

rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-

mation is displayed on the Artist/song title

line on the display.

* Windows姞and Windows Media姞are regis-

tered trademarks and trademarks in the United

States of America and other countries of Mi-

crosoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA

files is as illustrated.

●The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:

UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for

folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there

will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if

so equipped)

This system supports various USB memory

sticks, USB hard drives and iPod姞players. There

are some USB devices which may not be sup-

ported with this system.

●Make sure that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB connector.

●Do not force the memory stick or USB cable

into the USB connector.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If this

occurs, remove the USB memory stick and

dehumidify or ventilate the player com-

pletely.

●The player sometimes cannot function when

the passenger compartment temperature is

extremely high. Decrease the temperature

before use.

●Do not leave the USB memory in a place

prone to static electricity or where the air

conditioner blows directly. The data in the

USB memory may be damaged.

●Prepare the USB device by yourself be-

cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.

●The USB device cannot be formatted with

this system. If you want to format the USB

memory, use your personal computer.

●Partitioned USB devices may not be played

correctly.

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on the vehicle center screen.

NISSAN recommends using English lan-

guage characters with USB devices.

●Do not connect the USB device if the con-

nector or cable is wet. Allow the cable

and/or connectors to dry completely before

connecting the USB device.

●Large video podcast files cause slow re-

sponses in the iPod姞. The vehicle center

display may momentarily black out, but it will

soon recover.

●If the iPod姞automatically selects large video

podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but it will soon recover.

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on the iPod姞.

●The iPod姞nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod姞.

●The iPod姞nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞

nano (2nd generation).

●If you are using an iPod姞(3rd Generation

with Dock connector), do not use very long

names for the song title, album name or artist

name to avoid the iPod姞resetting itself.

iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

iPod姞* player (if so equipped)

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on the vehicle center screen. We

recommend using English language charac-

ters with an iPod姞.

●Large video podcast files cause slow re-

sponses in the iPod姞. The vehicle center

display may momentarily black out, but it will

soon recover.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

●If the iPod姞automatically selects large video

podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but it will soon recover.

●Improperly plugging in the iPod姞may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod姞

is connected properly.

●The iPod姞nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞

nano (2nd Generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on the iPod姞.

●The iPod姞nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod姞.

●If you are using an iPod姞(3rd Generation

with Dock connector), do not use very long

names for the song title, album name or artist

name to prevent the iPod姞from resetting

itself.

●Be careful not to do the following, or the

cable could be damaged and a loss of func-

tion may occur:

●Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40

mm) radius maximum).

●Twist the cable excessively (more than

180 degrees).

●Pull or drop the cable.

●Close the center console lid on the cable

or connectors.

●Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

●Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.

●Do not connect the cable to the iPod姞if the

cable and/or connectors are wet. It may

damage the iPod姞.

●If the cable and connectors are exposed to

water, allow the cable and/or connectors to

dry completely before connecting the cable

to the iPod姞(wait 24 hours for it to dry).

●If the connector is exposed to fluids other

than water, evaporative residue may cause a

short between the connector pins. In this

case, replace the cable, otherwise damage

to the iPod姞and a loss of function may

occur.

●If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con-

nectors cracked, contamination such as liq-

uids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do

not use the cable and contact a NISSAN

dealer to replace the cable with a new one.

●When not in use for extended periods of

time, store the cable in a clean, dust free

environment at room temperature and with-

out direct sun exposure.

●Do not use the cable for any other purposes

other than its intended use in the vehicle.

*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. FM-AM button

2. CD eject button

3. SEEK button

4. CD button

5. CD insert slot

6. AUX button

7. TUNE button

8. MENU button

9. RPT button

10. AUX IN jack

11. VOLUME control knob

12. PWR button

13. SCAN button

14. RDM button

15. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so

equipped)

For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-

tion precautions⬙in this section.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the PWR button while the system

is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) that

was playing immediately before the system was

turned off. While the system is on, pressing the

PWR button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

MENU button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Balance

and Clock):

Press the MENU button to change the mode as

follows:

BAS (Bass) →TRE (Treble) →FAD (Fade) →

BAL (Balance) →Clock →Normal mode

Type A

LHA1224

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

Press the SEEK or or TUNE

or button to adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade

and Balance to the desired level. Fade adjusts

the sound level between the front and rear speak-

ers and Balance adjusts the sound between the

right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. If no

action is taken, the radio or CD display will auto-

matically reappear after approximately 10 sec-

onds.

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignition

switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to

select the CLK-ON mode. Press the MENU but-

ton repeatedly until CLK-OFF mode is displayed.

Use the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button to en-

able CLK-ON mode.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until

“Clock:” appears. The hours will begin flash-

ing.

2. Press the SEEK button or or

the TUNE button or to adjust

the hours.

3. Press the MENU button again. The minutes

will begin flashing.

4. Press the SEEK button or or

the TUNE button or to adjust

the minutes.

5. Press the MENU button again to exit the

clock set mode.

If no action is taken, the display will return to the

regular clock display after 10 seconds.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio automatically changes

from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE button (Tuning):

Press the TUNE button or for

manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK button or to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies and to

stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the but-

ton again during this 5 second period will stop

SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to

that station. If the SCAN button is not pressed

within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the

next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for

FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the AM·FM select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and carefully insert the compact disc

into the slot with the label side up. The compact

disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts

to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

TUNE (Rewind or Fast

Forward) button:

When the TUNE button or is

pressed while the compact disc is playing, the

compact disc plays at an increased speed while

reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the compact disc returns to normal play

speed.

SEEK button:

When the SEEK button is pressed while

the compact disc is playing, the next track follow-

ing the present one starts to play from the begin-

ning. Press the SEEK button several times

to skip several tracks. Each time the button is

pressed, the CD advances one additional track.

The track number appears in the display window.

(When the last track on the compact disc is

skipped, the first track is played.)

When the SEEK button is pressed, the

track being played returns to the beginning.

Press the SEEK button several times to

skip back several tracks. Each time the button is

pressed the CD moves back one track.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while a com-

pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

1CDRDM←→ 1CDRPT

1 CD RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played

randomly.

1 CD RPT: play pattern returns to normal.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while a com-

pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

1TRRPT←→ 1CDRPT

1 TR RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 CD RPT: play pattern returns to normal.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the front of the

radio. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a por-

table cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a

laptop computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device

when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc

is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will

reload.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

1. MUTE button

2. DISP/TEXT button

3. FM-AM button

4. CD button

5. CD insert slot

6. iPod button

7. AUX button

8. CLOCK button

9. CD eject button

10. TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button

11. SCAN/RPT button

12. AUDIO button

13. AUX IN jack

14. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

15. VOLUME control knob

16. PWR button

17. iPod MENU button

18. BACK button

19. ENTER button

20. SEEK/TRACK button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so

equipped)

For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-

tion precautions⬙in this section.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the PWR button while the system

is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) that

was playing immediately before the system was

turned off. While the system is on, pressing the

PWR button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Type B

LHA1225

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

MUTE button:

Press the button to mute the audio sound.

Press the button again to resume playing

the audio at its previous volume.

AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Bal-

ance, SSV, Beep):

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as

follows:

Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance →Speed

Sensitive Volume (SSV) →Beep ON/OFF →

Normal mode

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press

the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-

pears in the display. Press the TUNE

or or SEEK or button to ad-

just the selected mode to the desired level. Fade

adjusts the sound level between the front and

rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound

between the right and left speakers.

To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press the

TUNE button up or down until the desired mode

is displayed. This will enable or disable the beep

sound heard during menu selection.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)

mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the

TUNE button or until the desired

setting is displayed.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. If no

action is taken, the radio or CD display will auto-

matically reappear after approximately 5 sec-

onds.

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignition

switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to

select the CLK-ON mode. Press the MENU but-

ton repeatedly until CLK-OFF mode is displayed.

Use the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button to en-

able CLK-ON mode.

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until the

clock display starts to flash.

2. Press the SEEK/TRACK button

or to adjust the hours.

3. Press the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

button or to adjust the minutes.

4. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the

clock set mode.

If no action is taken, the display will return to the

regular clock display after 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button

This button works during FM, CD and iPod姞

operation. See the detailed function for this but-

ton in the section for each mode.

iPOD姞MENU, ENTER and BACK buttons

These buttons can only be used for iPod姞opera-

tions. See “iPod姞Player Operation without Navi-

gation System (Type A)” in this section for details

about the functions of these buttons.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio automatically changes

from stereo to monaural reception.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

TUNE button (Tuning):

Press the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

button or for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button or

to tune from low to high or high to low frequen-

cies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN/RPT button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the

button again during this 5 second period will stop

SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to

that station. If the SCAN/RPT button is not

pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves

to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for

FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the AM·FM select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

DISP/TEXT button:

When the DISP/TEXT button is pressed while in

FM radio mode, the radio display will change as

follows:

Frequency →PTY →PS →Frequency

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and carefully insert the compact disc

into the slot with the label side up. The compact

disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts

to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

DISP/TEXT button:

When the DISP/TEXT button is pressed while a

CD is playing, the display will change as follows:

CD:

Track number →Disc title →Song title →Track

number

CD with MP3 or WMA:

Track number →Folder title →Album title →

Artist →Song title →Track number

TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

button:

CD:

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER

button (fast forward) or (reverse) is

pressed while the compact disc is playing, the

compact disc plays at an increased speed while

reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the compact disc returns to normal play

speed.

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button

(fast forward) or (reverse) is

pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the

compact disc is playing, the folders in the CD will

change.

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button

(fast forward) or (reverse) is

pressed for more than 1.5 seconds while the

compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays

at an increased speed while reversing or fast

forwarding. When the button is released, the

compact disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the SEEK/TRACK button is

pressed while the compact disc is playing, the

next track following the present one starts to play

from the beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACK

button several times to skip several tracks.

Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-

vances one additional track. The track number

appears in the display window. (When the last

track on the compact disc is skipped, the first

track is played.)

When the SEEK/TRACK button is

pressed, the track being played returns to the

beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACK

button several times to skip back several

tracks. Each time the button is pressed the CD

moves back one track.

SCAN/RPT button:

When the SCAN/RPT button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

REPEAT TRACK →RANDOM TRACK →RE-

PEAT DISC

CD with MP3 or WMA:

REPEAT FOLDER →REPEAT TRACK →RAN-

DOM TRACK →RANDOM FOLDER →REPEAT

DISC

REPEAT TRACK: the current track will be re-

peated.

RANDOM TRACK: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

REPEAT DISC: play pattern returns to normal.

REPEAT FOLDER: the current folder will be re-

peated.

RANDOM FOLDER: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the front of the

radio. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a por-

table cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a

laptop computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device

when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc

is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will

reload.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

1. SCAN button

2. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

3. CD insert slot

4. iPod MENU button

5. CD eject button

6. TUNE/FOLDER knob/Setting control

button

7. SEEK/TRACK buttons

8. AUX IN jack

9. AUX button*

10. CD button

11. FM-AM button

12. RPT button

13. POWER/VOLUME control knob

14. RDM button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the AUX button is pressed to ac-

cess satellite radio stations unless op-

tional satellite receiver and antenna are

installed and an XM姞satellite radio ser-

vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

(Type A) (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-

tion precautions⬙in this section.

Audio main operation

VOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio

or CD) that was playing immediately before the

system was turned off.

Type A

LHA1269

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF

control knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this feature

is active, the audio volume changes as the driving

speed changes.

Setting control knob (Audio, Display and

Clock):

Press the ENTER button to adjust the audio,

display and clock settings as follows:

Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance →Speed

Sensitive Volume (SSV) (if so equipped) →

Brightness →Contrast →On-screen Clock →

Clock Adjust →Bass

Once the desired setting is displayed on the

screen, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob left or right

to adjust the chosen setting. Press the ENTER

button to move to the next setting or wait approxi-

mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustment

mode.

Audio settings:

Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance by

selecting the desired setting with the ENTER

button and then adjusting the level with the

TUNE/SCROLL knob. Balance adjusts the

sound between the left and right speakers. Fade

adjusts the sound between the front and rear

speakers.

Speed Sensitive Volume (if so equipped):

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)

level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,

choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) set-

ting with the ENTER button and then adjust the

level with the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Speed Sen-

sitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the

audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed

changes.

LHA1270 LHA1271

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

Display settings:

To adjust the brightness or contrast of the display

screen, press the ENTER button until the chosen

setting is displayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLL

knob to adjust the display to the desired level.

On-screen Clock:

The clock is shown in the upper right corner of

the screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enable

the clock display after it has been turned off,

press the ENTER button until the On-screen

Clock mode is displayed. Use the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to toggle the feature on or

off.

Clock adjust:

To adjust the time, perform the following steps:

1. Press the ENTER button repeatedly until the

Clock Adjust mode is displayed on the

screen.

2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust the

hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob

left or right and press the ENTER button.

3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust the

minutes by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob

left or right and press the ENTER button.

LHA1272 LHA1273 LHA1274

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

iPod姞MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod姞opera-

tions. See “iPod姞Player Operation without Navi-

gation System (Type B)” in this section for details

about the function of this button.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on

the screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-

matically changes from stereo to monaural re-

ception.

SAT band select:

Pressing the AUX button will change the band as

follows:

AUX →XM1* →XM2* →AUX (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-

tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the

radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn

the radio on.

*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite

radio mode will be skipped unless an optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an

XM姞satellite radio service subscription is active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning):

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right

for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK buttons or to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies and to

stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear

on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is

not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning

moves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for

FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and carefully insert the compact disc

into the slot with the label side up. The compact

disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts

to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

CD/MP3 display mode:

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text

may be displayed on the screen if the CD has

been encoded with text information. Depending

on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-

tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-

played.

The track number and the total number of tracks

in the current folder or on the current disc are

displayed on the screen as well. For example, the

first track out of fourteen total is currently playing.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons

or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc

is playing to reverse or fast forward the track

being played. The compact disc plays at an in-

creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT

button several times to skip backward sev-

eral tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the SEEK/CAT button several times

to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on

a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is

played. If the last track in a folder of an

MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

LHA1275

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD

only):

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-

ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change

folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a

folder.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while a com-

pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRK RPT →OFF

1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while a com-

pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 DISC RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →OFF

1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played

randomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

AUX button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The

AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard

analog audio input such as from a portable cas-

sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop

computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device

plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is

also used to switch the audio system to a source

plugged into the USB input jack in the center

console. When a device is plugged into the AUX

IN jack while another device is plugged into the

USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle

between the two functions.

For more information about the USB input jack,

see “USB interface” in this section.

EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc

is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will

reload.

Additional features

For more information about the iPod姞player

available with this system, see “iPod姞player op-

eration without Navigation System (Type B)” in

this section.

For more information about the USB interface

available with this system, see “USB interface

(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-

tion.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

1. XM button

2. CD insert slot

3. Display screen

4. CD eject button

5. SETUP button

6. BACK button

7. TUNE/SCROLL knob, AUDIO button

8. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

9. AUX button

10. VOL/ON-OFF control knob

11. SEEK/CATEGORY button

12. CD button

13. FM-AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the XM button is pressed to ac-

cess satellite radio stations unless op-

tional satellite receiver and antenna are

installed and an XM姞satellite radio ser-

vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

(Type B) (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

Audio main operation

VOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,

CD, AUX, USB or iPod姞) that was playing imme-

diately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF

control knob.

Type B

LHA1473

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Vol-

ume for audio. When this feature is active, the

audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.

Audio settings:

Press the SETUP button to display the audio

settings on the screen. These settings can also

be displayed by pressing the AUDIO button

(TUNE/SCROLL knob). Use the touchscreen to

adjust the following items to the desired setting:

Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade:

Controls the sound of the audio system. Balance

adjusts the sound between the left and right

speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the

front and rear speakers.

Speed Volume:

Controls the level to which the volume is adjusted

as the vehicle’s driving speed changes. Choose a

setting between 1 and 5 or choose 0 to disable

the feature entirely.

AUX Level:

Controls the volume level of incoming sound

when an auxiliary device is connected to the

system. Available options are Quiet, Medium and

Loud.

LHA1486 LHA1487

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the

screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-

matically changes from stereo to monaural re-

ception.

XM band select:

Pressing the XM button will change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1* (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will

come on at the last station played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn

the radio on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite

radio mode will be skipped unless an optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an

XM姞satellite radio service subscription is active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

While the radio is in XM mode, the operation can

be controlled through the touchscreen. Touch

the “Channels” key to display a list of channels.

Touch a channel displayed on the list to change

to that channel. Touch the “Categories” key to

display a list of categories. Touch a category

displayed on the list to display options within that

category.

LHA1492

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Tuning with the touchscreen:

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned

using the touchscreen. To bring up the visual

tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right

corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar

running from low frequencies on the left to high

frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the

location of the frequency you wish to tune and the

station will change to that frequency. To return to

the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”

key.

Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob:

The radio can also be manually tuned using the

TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,

turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower

frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.

When in XM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL

knob to change the channel.

SEEK tuning:

When in FM or AM mode, press the

SEEK/CATEGORY button or to

tune from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

When in XM mode, press the SEEK/CATEGORY

button or to change the category.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for

FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the

XM band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button or choose

the radio band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the

XM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual or

seek tuning. Press and hold any of the de-

sired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a

beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position

and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot

with the label side up. The compact disc is auto-

matically pulled into the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

LHA1489

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD,

certain text may be displayed (when a CD en-

coded with text is being used). Depending on

how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the

text is displayed listing the artist, album and song

title.

There are other keys displayed on the screen

when a CD is playing:

Random:

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the CD. When the random mode is

active, the icon will be displayed to the left

of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-

ing “Random” alternates between randomly play-

ing songs within the current folder and songs

from the CD as a whole. The icon is dis-

played to the left of the song title or folder name

to denote which pattern is applied. To cancel

Random mode, touch the “Random” key until

no icon is displayed.

Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the CD. When the repeat mode is

active, the icon will be displayed to the left

of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-

ing “Repeat” alternates between repeating the

current song and repeating the current folder.

The icon is displayed to the left of the song

title or folder name to denote which pattern is

applied. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Re-

peat” key until no icon is displayed.

LHA1488 LHA1490 LHA1491

4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Browse:

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on

the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in

the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is

playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list

the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for

selecting a song with the touchscreen to choose

a folder.

SEEK/CATEGORY (Re-

verse or Fast Forward)

button:

Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY

button or for 1.5 seconds while the

compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward

the track being played. The compact disc plays at

an increased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the com-

pact disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CATEGORY button:

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while

a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/CATEGORY button several times

to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while

a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY

button several times to skip forward sev-

eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the

first track on the disc is played. If the last track in

a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first

track of the next folder is played.

AUX button:

The AUX IN jack is located in the storage area

above the audio system. The AUX IN audio input

jack accepts any standard analog audio input

such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,

MP3 player or a laptop computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device

plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is

also used to switch the audio system to a source

plugged into the USB input jack in the center

console. When a device is plugged into the AUX

IN jack while another device is plugged into the

USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle

between the two functions.

LHA1493

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

For more information about the USB input jack,

see “USB interface” in this section.

EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc

is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc will

reload.

Additional features

For more information about the iPod姞player

available with this system, see “iPod姞player op-

eration with Navigation System” in this section.

For more information about the USB interface

available with this system, see “USB interface

(models with Navigation System)” in this section.

USB INTERFACE (models without

Navigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB input

jack

The USB input jack is located in the center con-

sole. Open the protective cover 䊊

1on the USB

jack, then insert the USB device into the jack 䊊

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-

age device can be played through the vehicle’s

audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX button to switch to

the USB input mode. If another audio source is

plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,

the AUX button toggles between the two

sources.

WHA1358

4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Play information

Information about the audio files being played

can be displayed on the display screen of the

vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the

audio files are encoded, information such as

Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total tracks in

the folder are displayed on the screen as well. For

example, the fourth track out of twelve total is

currently playing.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons

or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on

the USB device is playing to reverse or fast

forward the track being played. The track plays at

an increased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the audio

file returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/CAT button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button

several times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track in a folder on the USB device is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while an audio

file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

ALL RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →OFF

ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will be

played randomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while an audio

file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRACK RPT →OFF

1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

LHA1280

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

TUNE/SCROLL knob:

If there are multiple folders with audio files on the

USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip

back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio

files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-

turn to the first track on the USB device.

USB INTERFACE (models with

Navigation System)

Connecting a device to the USB input

jack

The USB input jack is located in the center con-

sole. Open the protective cover 䊊

1on the USB

jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-

age device can be played through the vehicle’s

audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX button to switch to

the USB input mode. If another audio source is

playing and a USB memory device is inserted,

press the AUX button repeatedly until the center

display changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL

control knob to restart the USB memory.

LHA1500

4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Play information

Information about the audio files being played is

shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s

audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list

of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the

name of a song on the screen to begin playing

that song.

SEEK/CATEGORY button:

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while

an audio file on the USB device is playing to

return to the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CATEGORY button several

times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while

an audio file on the USB device is playing to

advance one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY

button several times to skip forward sev-

eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB

device is skipped, the first track of the next folder

is played.

Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY

button or for 1.5 seconds while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse

or fast forward the track being played. The track

plays at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is released, the

audio file returns to normal play speed.

Random and repeat play mode:

While files on a USB device are playing, the play

pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated

or played randomly.

Random:

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the USB device. When the random

mode is active, the icon is displayed to the

left of the song title or album name to denote

which random pattern is applied. To cancel Ran-

dom mode, touch the “Random” key until

no icon is displayed.

Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the USB device. When the repeat

mode is active, the icon is displayed to the

left of the song title or album name to denote

which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat

mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icon

is displayed.

LHA1496

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(Type A) (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod姞

The iPod姞outlet connector is located on the

center console. Your vehicle is equipped with the

specialized cable for connecting the iPod姞to

your vehicle audio unit. To connect the iPod姞, first

open the protective cover from the connector in

the center console 䊊

1. Next, connect one end of

the iPod姞cable to the iPod姞and the other end of

the cable to the connector in the center console

䊊

2. If compatible, the battery of your iPod姞is

charged during the connection to the vehicle.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,

fully depress the center connector button to un-

latch the connector and pull the connector

straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the cable

from the iPod姞, fully depress the side connector

buttons and pull the iPod姞connector straight out

of the iPod姞.

*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod姞Classic - 1st through 6th generation

●iPod姞Mini - 1st and 2nd generation

●iPod姞Nano - 1st through 3rd generation

●iPod姞Touch - 1st generation

●iPhone姞- 1st generation

Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

iPod姞button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the iPod姞button to switch to

the iPod姞mode.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞is

connected, press the iPod姞button to switch to

the iPod姞mode.

If the system is turned off while the iPod姞is

playing, the iPod姞will start when the PWR button

is pressed.

Top menu item selecting:

Press the iPod姞MENU button while the iPod姞is

connected to show the interface for iPod姞opera-

tion on the audio display. The items can be cho-

sen from the menu list screen by pressing the

SEEK button or while the iPod姞is

operational. The display pattern can be changed

as follows:

Playlists →Artists →Albums →Songs →Pod-

casts →Genres →Composers →Audiobooks

For more information about each item, see the

iPod姞owner’s manual.

WHA1355

4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

ENTER and BACK buttons:

Press the ENTER button while the top menu is

displayed to show program details on the audio

display. Use the SEEK buttons or to

scroll through the choices and press the ENTER

button to make a selection. Press the BACK

button to return to the previous display.

iPod姞play information:

Press the DISP TEXT button for less than 1.5

seconds while a program is playing to change the

displayed program information as follows:

Excluding Podcast:

Album Title →Artist Name →Song Title →

Normal Mode

Podcast:

Album Title →Song Title →Normal Mode

For more information about Podcasts, see the

iPod姞owner’s manual.

TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button:

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button is

pressed or for more than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will

play while fast forwarding or reversing. When the

button is released, the iPod姞will return to the

normal play speed.

When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button is

pressed or for less than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod姞is playing, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the iPod姞

will be played.

SCAN/RPT button:

Press the SCAN/RPT button while a track is

playing to change the play pattern as follows:

Excluding Podcast and Audiobook:

ALL RPT →TRK RPT →ALL RDM →ALBUM

RDM

Podcast:

ALL RPT ←→ TRK RPT

For more information about Podcasts, see the

iPod姞owner’s manual.

Audiobook:

NORMAL →FAST →SLOW

iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(Type B) (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod姞

To connect an iPod姞to the vehicle so that the

iPod姞can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB jack

located in the center console. Open the protec-

tive cover 䊊

1on the USB jack in the center

console. Then connect the iPod姞-specific end of

the cable to the iPod姞and the USB end of the

cable to the USB jack 䊊

2on the vehicle. When

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

WHA1358

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

the battery of your iPod姞(if compatible) is

charged during the connection to the vehicle.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod姞from the vehicle, remove

the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on

the vehicle, then remove the cable from the

iPod姞.

*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod姞Classic - 1st through 6th generation

●iPod姞Mini - 1st and 2nd generation

●iPod姞Nano - 1st through 3rd generation

●iPod姞Touch - 1st generation

●iPhone姞- 1st generation

Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the AUX button repeatedly

until the iPod姞mode is displayed on the screen.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞is

connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to

switch to the iPod姞mode.

If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the

iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will start when the

VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.

Interface:

The interface for iPod姞operation shown on the

vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to

the iPod姞interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLL

knob and ENTER button to navigate the menus

on the screen. The iPod姞MENU button on the

vehicle audio system is used to move up one level

in the iPod姞menus.

Depending on the iPod姞model, the following

items may be available on the menu list screen.

For further information about each item, see the

iPod姞Owner’s Manual.

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Songs

●Podcasts

●Genres

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●ShuffleSongs

SEEK/CAT buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or to

skip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons

or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing

to reverse or fast forward the track being played.

The track plays at an increased speed while

reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the track returns to normal play speed.

RPT button:

Press the RPT button while a track is playing to

change the play pattern as follows:

1 TRK RPT →ALL RPT →RPT OFF

1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are re-

peated.

RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.

4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

RDM button:

Press the RDM button while a track is playing to

change the play pattern as follows:

TRK SHUFFLE →ALBUM SHUFFLE →

SHUFFLE OFF

TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list will

be played randomly.

ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current list

will be played randomly.

SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is ap-

plied.

iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod姞

To connect an iPod姞to the vehicle so that the

iPod姞can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB jack

located in the center console. Open the protec-

tive cover on the USB jack in the center console

and then connect the iPod姞-specific end of the

cable to the iPod姞and the USB end of the cable

to the USB jack on the vehicle 䊊

1. If your iPod姞

supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-

tery will be charged while connected to the ve-

hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod姞from the vehicle, remove

the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on

the vehicle, then remove the cable from the

iPod姞.

*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod姞Classic - 5th generation

●iPod姞Nano - 1st through 2nd generation

Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

LHA1500

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

Audio main operation

AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the AUX button repeatedly

until the iPod姞mode is displayed on the screen.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞is

connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to

switch to the iPod姞mode.

If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the

iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will start when the

VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.

Interface:

The interface for iPod姞operation shown on the

vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to

the iPod姞interface. Use the touchscreen,

BACK button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

navigate the menus on the screen.

When the iPod姞is playing, touch the “Menu” key

to bring up the iPod姞interface.

Depending on the iPod姞model, the following

items may be available on the menu list screen.

For further information about each item, see the

iPod姞Owner’s Manual.

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Genres

●Songs

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●Podcasts

SEEK/CATEGORY button:

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button

or to skip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY

button or for 1.5 seconds while a

track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track

being played. The track plays at an increased

speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the track returns to normal

play speed.

Random and repeat play mode:

While the iPod姞is playing, the play pattern can

be altered so that songs are repeated or played

randomly.

LHA1494 LHA1495

4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Random:

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the iPod姞. When the random mode is

active, the icon is displayed to the left of

the song title or album name to denote which

random pattern is applied. To cancel Random

mode, touch the “Random” key until no

icon is displayed.

Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the iPod姞. When the repeat mode is

active, the icon is displayed to the left of

the song title or album name to denote which

repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat

mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icon

is displayed. CD CARE AND CLEANING

●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0049

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

1. Tuning switch

2. MODE select switch

3. POWER on/off switch

4. Volume control switch

1. Tuning switch

2. Phone operation switch

3. POWER on and MODE select switch

4. Volume control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

If you have the Type A switch, with the ignition

switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push

the POWER switch to turn the audio system on

or off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition

switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push

the MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch (models without

Navigation System)

Push the MODE select switch to change the

mode in the following sequence:

AM →FM* →SAT** (if so equipped) →CD*** →

USB/iPod*** (if so equipped) →AUX*** →AM

* When using the MODE switch, the audio mode

switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or FM2)

that was last active. To switch between the FM1

and FM2 preset banks, use the controls on the

audio system.

** When using the MODE switch, the audio mode

switches to the XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2)

that was last active. To switch between the XM1

and XM2 preset banks, use the controls on the

audio system.

*** These modes are only available when compat-

ible media is connected to the system.

Type A

LHA0692

Type B

WHA0693

4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

MODE select switch (models with

Navigation System)

Push the MODE select switch to change the

mode in the following sequence:

AM/FM* →XM** →CD*** →USB/AUX*** →

AM/FM*

* When using the MODE switch, the audio mode

switches to the preset bank (AM, FM1 or FM2)

that was last active. To switch between the AM,

FM1 and FM2 preset banks, use the controls on

the audio system.

** When using the MODE switch, the audio mode

switches to the XM preset bank (XM1, XM2 or

XM3) that was last active. To switch between the

XM preset banks, use the controls on the audio

system.

*** These modes are only available when compat-

ible media is connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down to

increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less

than 1.5 seconds to change presets.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for more

than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous

radio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for less

than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present track or skip to the next track. Push

several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be

removed. When you need to remove the antenna,

turn the antenna rod counterclockwise 䊊

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod

clockwise 䊊

Aand hand tighten.

CAUTION

Always properly tighten the antenna rod

during installation or the antenna rod may

break during vehicle operation.

LHA0709

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation. Some juris-

dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-

phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-

ercise extreme caution at all times so

full attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route the

antenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth姞

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth姞wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting

procedure is required. Your phone is automatically

connected with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with

the previously connected cellular phone turned on

and carried in the vehicle.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth姞

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the hands-free phone

system.

●

Some Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phones may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone mod-

ule. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

for a recommended phone list and connecting

instructions.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

WHA1356

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth姞wireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth姞

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●If the hands-free phone system seems to be

malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”

later in this section. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH威is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed

to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth姞Phone

System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the button is

pressed before the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone system

not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Repeat the command in a

clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-

tion” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-

sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to

indicate you have exited the system.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, press the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

●In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel.

●To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example,

press the button and after the tone

say, “Call Redial.”

NOTE:

The combined command of Call and (a

Name) cannot be used.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following rules and examples.

●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

●Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred”

●Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continue en-

tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

●Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-

able when using the “Special Dialing” com-

mand and the “Send” command during a

call).

See “List of voice commands” and “Special

Dialing” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

●Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using

the “Special Dialing” command).

●Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available

only when storing a phone book number).

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at any

time. Please use the “Help” command to get

information on how to use the system. CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth姞Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a

VR session or answer an incoming

call.

LHA0707

4-66 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

You can also use the button

to interrupt the system feedback

and give a command at once. See

“List of voice commands” and

“During a call” in this section for

more information.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition system

is active, press and hold the

button for 5 seconds to quit the

voice recognition system at any

time.

TUNING SWITCH

While using the voice recognition

system, tilt the tuning switch up or

down to manually control the

phone system.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-

ditional command options, refer to “List of voice

commands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free

Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-

ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see

“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this sec-

tion.

4. The system announces the current language

and gives you the option to change the lan-

guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in

French). To select the current language,

press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. To

select a different language, tilt the tuning

switch ( or ) up or down.

NOTE:

You must press the button within 5

seconds to change the language.

5. If you decide not to change the language, do

not press either button. After 5 seconds, the

VR session will end, and the language will

not be changed.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” 䊊

“Add phone” 䊊

Initiate from handset 䊊

Name phone 䊊

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. The system announces the available

commands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊

A. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-67

3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊

B. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

connecting from the phone handset 䊊

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. See the cellular phone Own-

er’s Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN recommended

cellular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and

cannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone 䊊

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is connected

and the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

Main Menu

“Call” 䊊

“Phone Number” 䊊

Speak the digits 䊊

“Dial” 䊊

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” 䊊

A. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10

digits or any special characters.

3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊

B. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with

the area code in single digit format 䊊

C.Ifthe

system has trouble recognizing the correct

phone number, try entering the number in

the following groups: 3-digit area code,

3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-

ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five

five five” as the 1st group, then “one two

one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five

four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than

10 digits or any special characters, say

“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-

bers” in this section for more information.

5. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and an-

nounces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” 䊊

D. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, press the button

on the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List of

voice commands” later in this section.

4-68 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the button on

the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the com-

mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear

the list of commands currently available any time

the system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,

you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the

system is waiting for a response. The system will

end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is

cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time

the system is waiting for a response.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

(Speak name) 䊊

“Phone Number”

(Speak Digits) 䊊

“Special Number” 䊊

“Redial” 䊊

“Call Back” 䊊

(Speak Name) 䊊

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you

can dial a number associated with a name and

location.

See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to

store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phone book entry you wish to call. The system

acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with the

name, the system asks you to choose the loca-

tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,

the system begins the call.

(Speak Digits) 䊊

When prompted by the system, say the number

you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”

and “Making a call by entering a phone number”

in this section for more details.

“Special Number” 䊊

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special

characters, say “Special Number”. When the

system acknowledges the command, the system

will prompt you to speak the number.

“Redial” 䊊

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the VR session.

“Call back” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of

the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-69

If a call back number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to call back” and

ends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command options

available. Press the button on the steering

wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-

mands.

●“Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

●“Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session

and returns to the call.

●“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns

to the call.

●“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send

command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during

a call. For example, if you were directed to

dial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command

and sends the tones associated with the

numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-

sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,

Say “pound” for “#”.

●“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-

mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth姞

Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular

phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular phone

to the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free System,

press the button.

●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone

network connection is lost while the Mute

feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset

to “off” for the next call so the other party

can hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones without

automatic phonebook download

function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

“Delete Entry” 䊊

“List Names” 䊊

For phones that do not support automatic down-

load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞pro-

file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu-

ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each

phone connected to the system.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

4-70 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

“Transfer entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you

would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then prompts

you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”

See “How to say numbers” in this section for

more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the transfer

from the phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellular

phone via the Bluetooth姞communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you

for the next command. When you have finished

entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose

“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” 䊊

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one

entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-

ognizes the command, speak the name to delete

or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Phonebook” (phones with automatic

phonebook download function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“List Names” 䊊

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

“Delete Entry” 䊊

“Record Name” 䊊

For phones that support automatic download of the

phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞profile), the

“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries

in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of

an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for

each phone connected to the system.

When a phone is connected to the system, the

phonebook is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. This feature allows you to access your

phonebook from the Bluetooth姞system and call

contacts by name. You can record a custom

voice tag for contact names that the system has

difficulty recognizing. For more information see

“Record Name” in this section.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-71

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“List names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the

“Record Name” command in this section for in-

formation about recording custom voice tags for

list entries that the system has difficulty pro-

nouncing.

“Transfer entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you

would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then prompts

you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”

See “How to say numbers” in this section for

more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the transfer

from the phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellular

phone via the Bluetooth姞communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you

for the next command. When you have finished

entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose

“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” 䊊

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one

entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-

ognizes the command, speak the name to delete

or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“Record name” 䊊

The system allows you to record custom voice

tags for contact names in the phonebook that the

vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can

also be used to record voice tags to directly dial

an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice

tags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” 䊊

“Incoming” 䊊

“Missed” 䊊

4-72 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Use the Recent Calls command to access out-

going, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” 䊊

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing

calls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming

calls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” 䊊

Use the Missed command to list the calls made to

the vehicle that were not answered.

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not available

when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” 䊊

“Select Phone” 䊊

“Delete Phone” 䊊

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage

the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable

the Bluetooth姞function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” 䊊

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to

the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this

section for more information.

“Select Phone” 䊊

Use the Select Phone command to select from a

list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

select. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Delete Phone” 䊊

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also

delete that phonebook for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent

a wireless connection to your phone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-

dialect users to train the system to improve rec-

ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of

commands, the users can create a voice model of

their own voice that is stored in the system. The

system is capable of storing a different speaker

adaptation model for each connected phone.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-

ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-

sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-

ferent language.”

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-73

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-

guage, see “Choosing a language” in this

section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected

automatically. If both memory locations are

already in use, the system will prompt you to

overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-

vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10. The system will announce that speaker ad-

aptation has been completed and the sys-

tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

●The button is pressed for more than 5

seconds in SA mode.

●The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs the

trainer to say the following phrases. (The system

will prompt you for each phrase.)

●phonebook transfer entry

●dial three oh four two nine

●delete call back number

●incoming

●transfer entry

●eight pause nine three two pause seven

●delete all entries

●call seven two four zero nine

●phonebook delete entry

●next entry

●dial star two one seven oh

●yes

●no

●select

●missed

●dial eight five six nine two

●Bluetooth on

●outgoing

●call three one nine oh two

●nine seven pause pause three oh eight

●cancel

●call back number

●call star two zero nine five

●delete phone

●dial eight three zero five one

●record name

●four three pause two nine pause zero

●delete redial number

●phonebook list names

●call eight oh five four one

●correction

●connect phone

●dial seven four oh one eight

●previous entry

●delete

●dial nine seven two six six

●call seven six three oh one

●go back

●call five six two eight zero

●dial six six four three seven

4-74 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the voice recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. The manual control mode does not

allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user

may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-

cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,

exit the manual control mode by pressing and

holding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that

time, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button

will start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips

●To enter manual control mode, start the

voice recognition system and tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙when

manual controls are initially activated.

●To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

always speak the current menu option. De-

pending on the audio display, it will also

show the current menu option.

●To select the current menu option, press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button.

●To go back to the previous menu, press the

PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current

menu is the Main Menu, pressing the

PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the

Phone system.

●To exit the manual control mode, press and

hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5

seconds.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-75

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-

prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-76 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2

Three-way catalyst..............................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(if so equipped) ................................5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover....................5-5

Off-road recovery...............................5-5

Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-6

Ignition switch.....................................5-7

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) .........5-7

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

(if so equipped) ................................5-8

Manual transmission (if so equipped) .............5-9

Ignition switch positions ........................5-10

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............5-10

Before starting the engine .........................5-11

Starting the engine ...............................5-11

Driving the vehicle ................................5-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

(if so equipped) ...............................5-12

Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-17

Parking brake ....................................5-19

Cruise control (if so equipped) .....................5-20

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-20

Cruise control operations.......................5-21

Break-in schedule ................................5-22

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-22

Parking/parking on hills............................5-23

Power steering ...................................5-24

Brake system ....................................5-24

Brake precautions .............................5-24

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

(if so equipped) ...............................5-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-26

Cold weather driving..............................5-28

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-28

Anti-freeze....................................5-28

Battery .......................................5-28

Draining of coolant water .......................5-28

Tire equipment ................................5-28

Special winter equipment.......................5-28

Driving on snow or ice .........................5-28

Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-29

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,

otherwise exhaust gases could be

drawn into the passenger compart-

ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid

open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

HI to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the trunk lid or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

●The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

km/h). Also, this system may not detect a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted for all 4 tires. After the tires are

inflated to the recommended pressure, the

vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and

turn off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates in low

ambient temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

●The Tire and Loading Information label (also

referred to as the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label) is located in the

driver’s door opening.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressure

warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for

all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label, located on the driver’s door

opening, to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

5-4 Starting and driving

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with

any vehicle, loss of control could result in a

collision with other vehicles or objects or

cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if

the loss of control causes the vehicle to

slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and

avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under

the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which may

cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as

outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions

and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

or improperly belted person is significantly

more likely to be injured or killed than a

person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-

hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed

is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-

hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle

speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-

propriate driving lane.

Starting and driving 5-5

●If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and

tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air

pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain

control of the vehicle by following the procedure

below. Please note that this procedure is only a

general guide. The vehicle must be driven as

appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-

hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

●Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency service

to change the tire or see “Changing a flat

tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-

scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your

ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-

hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

5-6 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock (for models with a

steering lock mechanism). This may

cause the driver to lose control of the

vehicle and could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

●Never place the ignition switch in the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock (for models with a

steering lock mechanism). This may

cause the driver to lose control of the

vehicle and could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so

equipped)

The Intelligent Key can operate the ignition

switch without taking the key out from your

pocket or purse. The operating environment

and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key

operation.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key inside

the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

●If the vehicle battery is discharged the

ignition switch cannot be moved from

the “LOCK” position and if the steering

lock is engaged, the steering wheel may

not be able to be moved. Charge the

battery as soon as possible. (See

“JUMP STARTING” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.)

LSD0175

IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-7

Operating range

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,

it is possible for anyone, even someone who does

not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignition

switch to start the engine.

The operating range of the engine start function

is inside of the vehicle 䊊

●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-

ment panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the

glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the

Intelligent Key may not function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so

equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position

until the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)

position.

●When moving the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, make sure the shift selector

is in the P (Park) position.

WSD0191

Without Intelligent Key

WSD0041

5-8 Starting and driving

●When removing the key from the ignition

switch, make sure the shift selector is in the

P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the

LOCK position:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON

direction.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition

switch.

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-

tion, the shift selector cannot be moved from the

P (Park) position.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON position and

the foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position

is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

The ignition switch includes a device that helps

prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-

ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-

tion switch to the LOCK position from the ACC or

ON position, place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, push the key in, then place the ignition

switch in LOCK position.

With Intelligent Key

LSD0175 WSD0052

Starting and driving 5-9

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel (for models with

steering lock mechanism), place the igni-

tion switch in the LOCK position. Remove

the key. To unlock the steering wheel, in-

sert the key and turn it gently while rotating

the steering wheel slightly right and left.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

●Intelligent Key :

●PUSH OFF- The steering lock can only

be locked at this position (for vehicles

equipped with a steering lock mecha-

nism).

OFF: (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel (for vehicles equipped with a

steering lock mechanism).

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

●Intelligent Key :

●PUSH ON- The ignition switch will be

unlocked while carrying the Intelligent

Key.

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as the

engine has started, release the key. It automati-

cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately 10

seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

5-10 Starting and driving

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake and clutch fluid, and windshield-

washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at

least whenever you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Lock all doors.

●Position seat and adjust head restraints and

headrests (if so equipped).

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See

“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. CVT model:

Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved out

of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition switch is

turned to the OFF position or if the key

is removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift selector is in any of the driving

positions.

Manual transmission model:

Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-

press the clutch pedal to the floor while

cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the clutch pedal is fully de-

pressed.

Models with Intelligent Key: Slowly

“PUSH ON” the ignition switch. When the

Intelligent Key warning light in the

meter illuminates in green, the ignition

switch can be turned.

The Intelligent Key must be carried

when operating the ignition switch.

When the Intelligent Key warning

light in the meter blinks in red and the

inside warning buzzer emits a short beep, be

sure that the shift selector is in the P (Park)

position and the ignition switch is securely

returned to the LOCK position.

The Intelligent Key warning light blink-

ing in red, turns off by performing the follow-

ing operations:

●Return the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

●

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.

When the buzzer beeps 4 times continu-

ously, check for the following:

●The ignition switch is returned to the

LOCK position.

●The mechanical key is not inserted into

the ignition switch.

The inside warning buzzer stops when one

of the following is performed:

●Return the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

●Remove the mechanical key from the ig-

nition switch.

●Close the doors.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-11

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

switch to START. Release the switch when

the engine starts. If the engine starts, but

fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it

and then crank the engine. Release the

switch and the accelerator pedal when

the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-

ing the ignition switch to START. Release

the key when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the ignition switch to off

and wait 10 seconds before cranking

again, otherwise the starter could be

damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving. This could

cause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-

ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake

should be used for this purpose.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-12 Starting and driving

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled to produce maximum power and smooth

operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

selector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting

the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brake

pedal MUST be depressed before shifting

from P (Park) to any drive position while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out of P

(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-

tions if the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK or OFF position or if the key is re-

moved.

To move the shift selector:

Push the button 䊊

Awhile depressing the

brake pedal

Push the button 䊊

Ato shift

Shift without pushing button 䊊

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to

any of the desired shift positions.

LSD0177

Starting and driving 5-13

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-

tor is in any position while the engine is

not running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal injury

or property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for

any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or

any drive position, the key cannot be turned to the

LOCK position and be removed from the ignition

switch. If this occurs, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) to park the

vehicle and turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK position to remove the key.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when

the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) selector position when the ve-

hicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the

shift selector button pushed in to move the

shift selector from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then place the shift selector into the P (Park)

position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when

the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting R (Reverse) position. R (Reverse)

speed is limited to 25 MPH (40 km/h). Do not

exceed 25 MPH (40 km/h) in the R (Reverse)

position. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the shift selector button

pushed in to move the shift selector from P

(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R

(Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low):

Use this position for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes

and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not

use the L (Low) position in any other circum-

stances.

5-14 Starting and driving

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)

When the manual shift mode button 䊊

Ais

pressed with the vehicle stopped or while driving,

the transmission enters the manual shift mode.

Shift ranges can be selected manually using the

paddles on the steering wheel 䊊

Band 䊊

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-

played on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

M6 (6th):

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

M5 (5th):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or

for engine braking when driving down long

slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill

grades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or

mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep

downhill grades.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than M6

range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Pull the + 䊊

Cpaddle on the steering wheel

towards you. (Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down:

Pull the ⫺䊊

Bpaddle on the steering wheel

towards you. (Shifts to lower range.)

●Pulling the same paddle twice will shift the

ranges in succession. However, if this mo-

tion is rapidly done, the second shifting may

not be completed properly.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Press the manual shift mode button 䊊

Ato return

the transmission to the normal driving mode.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

WSD0192 LSD0193

Starting and driving 5-15

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may shift up automatically to a

higher range than selected if the en-

gine speed is too high. When the ve-

hicle speed decreases, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down. The

transmission shifts to M1 (1st) gear

before the vehicle comes to a com-

plete stop. When accelerating again, it

is necessary to shift up to the desired

range.

●When the CVT fluid temperature is ex-

tremely low, the manual shift mode may not

work and automatically shift as a drive mode.

This is not a malfunction. In this case, press

the manual shift button 䊊

Aoff and drive for a

while and then reactivate the manual shift

mode.

●When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the

shift range may upshift in lower rpm than

usual. This is not a malfunction.

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may

not be moved from the P (Park) position even with

the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.

The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as

shown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock

release slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)

position while holding down the shift lock

release.

6. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-

sired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-

mission as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is depressed,

the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-

ing stop lights could cause an accident

injuring yourself and others.

LSD0178

5-16 Starting and driving

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the

shift selector in the D (Drive) position, the

light in the instrument panel illuminates. See

“Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)” in the

“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im-

proved engine braking.

To turn off the Overdrive off mode, push the O/D

OFF switch again. The indicator light will

turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when the shift

selector is shifted to any position other than D

(Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be automati-

cally turned off.

Accelerator downshift

— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will

not be shifted into the selected driving position.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. The MIL may

come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is

activated, see “Malfunction indicator light

(MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls”

section. This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this

case, place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and wait for 10 seconds. Then

place the ignition switch back in the ON

position. The vehicle should return to its

normal operating condition. If it does not

return to its normal operating condition,

have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-

sion and repair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,

vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.

The reduced speed may be lower than

other traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially care-

ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the

side of the road at a safe place and allow

the transmission to return to normal op-

eration, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Do not over-rev the engine when shift-

ing to a lower gear. This may cause a

loss of control or engine damage.

LSD0179

Starting and driving 5-17

CAUTION

●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This may cause clutch

damage.

●Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

●Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

●When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop

light), shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied. Shifting

To change gears or when upshifting or down-

shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into

the appropriate gear, then release the clutch

slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress

the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-

tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed

before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise

may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,

4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according

to vehicle speed.

To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring 䊊

1and

then move it to the R (Reverse) position after

stopping the vehicle completely.

The shift selector ring 䊊

1returns to its original

position when the shift selector is moved to the N

(Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R

(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then

release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch

pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road

conditions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 17 (27)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 36 (58)

5th to 6th 51 (82)

LSD0180

5-18 Starting and driving

Suggested maximum speed in each

gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,

use the highest gear suggested for that speed.

Always observe posted speed limits, and drive

according to the road conditions, which will en-

sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine

when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause

engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

MR20DE engine models:

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 27 (44)

2nd 49 (79)

3rd 68 (109)

4th —

5th —

6th —

QR25DE engine models:

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 33 (53)

2nd 53 (86)

3rd 75 (121)

4th —

5th —

6th —

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the shift selector in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

●Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-19

To engage: Pull the lever up 䊊

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)

position.

CVT models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button and lower com-

pletely 䊊

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicator

light in the instrument panel then blinks to

warn the driver.

●If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control switch off and have the sys-

tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●The SET indicator light may blink when the

cruise control switch is turned ON while

pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise

control system, use the following proce-

dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

WSD0169 LSD0176

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

5-20 Starting and driving

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depressing

the clutch pedal when the cruise control is

set. Should this occur, depress the clutch

pedal and turn the main switch off imme-

diately. Failure to do so may cause engine

damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in

the instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch

and release it. The SET indicator light in the

instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set

speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods.

●Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator

light in the instrument panel goes out.

●Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light

goes out.

●Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the

CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator

light in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and

the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

●you depress the brake or clutch pedal while

pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST

switch. The preset speed is deleted from

memory.

●the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-

mission), or move the shift selector to N

(Neutral) (CVT).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-21

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and en-

sure the future reliability and economy of

your new vehicle. Failure to follow these

recommendations may result in short-

ened engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-

hicles.

●Use a proper gear range which suits road

conditions. On level roads, shift into high

gear as soon as possible.

●Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-

proper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Air conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

See “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-22 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) for

CVT models or in an appropriate gear

for manual transmission models. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and re-

sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

selector has been pushed as far for-

ward as it can go and cannot be moved

without depressing the foot brake

pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)

position. When parking on an uphill grade,

place the shift selector in 1st gear.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-23

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

The power steering system is designed to pro-

vide power assist while driving to operate the

steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-

heating of the power steering system and protect

it from getting damaged. While the power assist

is reduced, steering wheel operation will become

heavy. When the temperature of the power steer-

ing system goes down, the power assist level will

return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering

wheel operations that could cause the power

steering system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is

operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

If the electric power steering warning light PS

illuminates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering system is not func-

tioning properly and may need servicing. Have

the power steering system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, there will be

no power assist for the steering but you will still

have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater

steering effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information see “Electric power

steering warning light” in the “Instruments and

controls” section.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-24 Starting and driving

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual and can be performed by a NISSAN

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS) (if so equipped)

WARNING

●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from careless

or dangerous driving techniques. It can

help maintain vehicle control during

braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-

ber that stopping distances on slippery

surfaces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-

sible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the

brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-

pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

Starting and driving 5-25

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6MPH(5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road

conditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are

close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies

and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is

similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses

various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-

hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the

system will control braking and engine output to

help keep the vehicle on its steered path.

●When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system is operating, the slip indicator in the

instrument panel blinks.

●If the indicator blinks, the road condi-

tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your

speed and driving to these conditions. See

“Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the

“Instruments and controls” section.

●Indicator light

– If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the and indicator lights

come on in the instrument panel.

– As long as these indicator lights are on,

the traction control function is canceled.

If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control system off using the VDC OFF

switch, VDC and Traction Control System (TCS)

functions will be turned off. The indicator

will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will

still operate with the VDC system off.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-26 Starting and driving

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

vibration from under the hood. This is normal and

indicates that the VDC system is working prop-

erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

designed to help improve driving stabil-

ity but does not prevent accidents due

to abrupt steering operation at high

speeds or by careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful when

driving and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

approved for your vehicle or are ex-

tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect ve-

hicle handling performance, and the

VDC OFF indicator light may come on.

●If brake related parts suck as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-

dard equipment or are extremely dete-

riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

system may not operate properly and

the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indi-

cator light may come on.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the Vehicle Dynamic Control system

may not operate properly and the VDC

OFF indicator light may come on. Do

not drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

suck as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF

indicator light may illuminate. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

●If wheels or tires other then the recom-

mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control system may not operate

properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-

trol OFF indicator light may come on.

●The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

not a substitute for winter tires or tire

chains on a snow covered road.

Starting and driving 5-27

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole, the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so

equipped) or the NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so

equipped).

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.

For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please

consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,

size, speed rating and availability informa-

tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see

“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra windshield-washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-28 Starting and driving

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control (if so

equipped) on slippery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-

riously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

Engine block heaters are available through

NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature

starting. The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or

lower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least2-4hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-29

MEMO

5-30 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...........................................6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(if so equipped) ................................6-2

Changing a flat tire .............................6-2

Jump starting .....................................6-8

Push starting.....................................6-10

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-11

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-13

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .........6-14

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the

vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the

TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-

vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds

above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer

to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-

ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for

all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission into R

(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the manual transmission is

shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is

shifted into P (Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks 䊊

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire

䊊

2to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is

jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury. Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the trunk and remove the trunk divider

(if so equipped) and the cargo net (if so

equipped). Lift the trunk floor carpeting and

spare tire cover 䊊

A. Remove the jack and the

spare tire as indicated.

WCE0044

LCE0134

In case of emergency 6-3

2. To remove the jack, turn the jack screw

counterclockwise and lift out. Removing bolt-on wheel cover (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-

sult in personal injury.

Wheel cover attachment to the wheel is made by

one of the wheel lug nuts. This wheel lug nut

needs to be removed before the wheel

cover can be removed from the wheel.

WCE0203 WCE0055

6-4 In case of emergency

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

CE1089

In case of emergency 6-5

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the

correct placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between

the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the

vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-

move the wheel nuts, and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until

they are tight.

LCE0020 WCE0048

6-6 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for three hours or more or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information Label.

5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle. 6. Install the jack in its storage area and tighten

the jack screw clockwise.

7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor

carpeting over the damaged tire.

8. Close the trunk.

LCE0136

In case of emergency 6-7

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions un-

der the heading “Wheels and tires” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

If the battery of a vehicle equipped with the

NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ is discharged, the

ignition switch cannot be moved from the

LOCK position, even using the mechanical

key or the valet key. Connect the jumper

cables to another vehicle, as in the case of

a discharged battery, and then the ignition

switch can be moved from the LOCK posi-

tion. Then, jump start the vehicle.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery

can damage your vehicle.

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-8 In case of emergency

●If the battery of a vehicle equipped with

the Intelligent Key system is dis-

charged, the ignition switch cannot be

moved from the LOCK position, even

using the mechanical key or the valet

key. Connect the jumper cables to an-

other vehicle, as in the case of a dis-

charged battery, and then the ignition

knob can be moved from the LOCK po-

sition. Then, jump start the vehicle.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage to

the charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-

lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)

or to P (Park) (CVT). Switch off all unneces-

sary electrical systems (lights, heater, air

conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

lustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

WCE0054

In case of emergency 6-9

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive

(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

For Intelligent Key system equipped models,

use the mechanical key to start the engine.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, place the ignition

switch in the off position and wait 3 to 4

seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

CAUTION

●Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

●Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-started or

tow-started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

●For manual transmission models, never

try to start the vehicle by towing it.

When the engine starts, the forward

surge could cause the vehicle to collide

with the tow vehicle.

PUSH STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is still hot. When the radiator

cap is removed, pressurized hot water

will spurt out, possibly causing serious

injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift selector

to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (CVT).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).

Open all the windows, move the heater or air

conditioner temperature control to maximum

hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-

ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not

open the hood further until no steam or

coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling

fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN

dealer.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-

age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-

able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-

tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to your

vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service

operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have

the service operator carefully read the following

precautions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any of these conditions apply, dollies or

a flatbed tow truck must be used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”

in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

䊊

(CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission

䊊

(M/T) Manual transmission

WCE0194

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

●Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) models with the front

wheels on the ground or four wheels on

the ground (forward or backward), as

this may cause serious and expensive

damage to the transmission. If it is nec-

essary to tow the vehicle with the rear

wheels raised always use towing dollies

under the front wheels.

●When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the

front wheels on towing dollies, or when

towing manual transmission models

with the front wheels on the ground:

– Turn the ignition switch to the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by turning

the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion. This may damage the steering

lock mechanism (for models

equipped with steering lock

mechanism).

– Move the shift selector to the N

(Neutral) position.

䊊

(CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission

䊊

(M/T) Manual transmission

WCE0195

In case of emergency 6-13

●When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) or manual trans-

mission (M/T) models with the rear

wheels on the ground (if you do not use

towing dollies): Always release the

parking brake.

●Observe the following restricted towing

speeds and distances for manual trans-

missions (M/T) only:

– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)

– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

●Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow

or free a stuck vehicle.

●Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

●Always pull the recovery device straight

out from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull at an angle.

●Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the

attachment point.

Front

WCE0146

Rear

SCE0578

6-14 In case of emergency

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-

cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-

vice.

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or

vehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System

(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)

and R (Reverse) (M/T models).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R

(Reverse) (M/T models).

●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing ........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-4

Tire dressings ..................................7-4

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Air fresheners ..................................7-5

Floor mats .....................................7-5

Seat belts .....................................7-6

Corrosion protection ...............................7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-6

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain.

●after driving on coastal roads.

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface.

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier

to clean if the inside high-mounted stop light (if

so equipped) is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mounted

stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the

high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

䊊

1Push toward rear of vehicle.

䊊

2Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly

reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electri-

cal conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

WAI0005

Appearance and care 7-3

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on the

center console and door pull finishers. If cleaning

is required use mild soap and water. However if

mild soap and water won’t clean the center con-

sole and door pull finishers, use NISSAN Vinyl

and Leather Cleaner (or equivalent).

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-

tion of the air bag system and result in

serious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION

●Never use benzene, thinner, or any simi-

lar material on the interior surfaces or

surface damage may occur. Such dam-

age is not covered under the NISSAN

warranty.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-

manent discoloration when they contact ve-

hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-

ener in a location that allows it to hang free

and not contact an interior surface.

●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause imme-

diate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-

tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for

your vehicle and are properly positioned in

the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained

with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-

come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to

act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor

mats have been specially designed for your ve-

hicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side

floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in

them. Position the mat by placing the floor mat

bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole

while centering the mat in the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are

properly positioned.

LPD0484

Appearance and care 7-5

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”

in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

●Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-6 Appearance and care

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, con-

sult a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements..........................8-2

General maintenance ..............................8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2

Maintenance precautions . . .........................8-5

Engine compartment check locations ................8-6

Engine cooling system .............................8-8

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-8

Changing engine coolant ........................8-9

Engine oil.........................................8-9

Checking engine oil level ........................8-9

Changing engine oil ...........................8-11

Changing engine oil filter .......................8-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ......8-13

Brake and clutch fluid .............................8-13

Brake fluid ....................................8-13

Clutch fluid ...................................8-14

Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-14

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-14

Battery ..........................................8-15

Jump starting .................................8-16

Drive belt ........................................8-16

Spark plugs......................................8-17

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-17

Air cleaner .......................................8-18

In-cabin microfilter.............................8-19

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-20

Cleaning .....................................8-20

Replacing ....................................8-20

Brakes ..........................................8-21

Fuses ...........................................8-22

Engine compartment...........................8-22

Passenger compartment .......................8-24

Battery replacement ..............................8-25

Keyfob (if so equipped) ........................8-25

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) ........8-27

Lights ...........................................8-28

Headlights....................................8-28

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-29

Wheels and tires .................................8-31

Tire pressure..................................8-31

Tire labeling...................................8-35

Types of tires..................................8-37

Tire chains....................................8-38

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-38

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-

mum maintenance requirements with long ser-

vice intervals to save you both time and money.

However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s

good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-

sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional

scheduled maintenance items are described and

listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure

that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,

a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN

dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

who are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-

hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather

than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to meet

the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —

in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

●For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or

wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following

items with an “*” is found later in this sec-

tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not bind

or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away

from the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-

tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-

ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the

vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly

steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely

with the shift selector in the P (Park) position

without applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held

on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake

applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,

see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat

adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they

operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in

every position. Check that the head restraints and

headrests move up and down smoothly and the

locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-

ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard

steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-

hicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that

the brake and clutch fluid level is between the

MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the

carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances from the

underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor

pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. For manual transmission

models, move the shift selector to N

(Neutral). For CVT models, move the

shift selector to P (Park).

●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●On gasoline engine models, the fuel

filter or fuel lines should be serviced by

a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines

are under high pressure even when the

engine is off.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

●Never leave the engine or the CVT re-

lated component harness connector

disconnected while the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even if

the ignition key is in the OFF position

and the engine is not running. To avoid

injury, always disconnect the negative

battery cable before working near the

fan.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-

able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-

der information” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

MR20DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)

4. Battery

5. Air cleaner

6. Fuse/Fusible link box

7. Radiator cap

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Drive belt location

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI0709

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)

4. Battery

5. Air cleaner

6. Fuse/Fusible link box

7. Radiator cap

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Drive belt location

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

* Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0637

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant to provide

year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection.

The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-

sion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system

additives are not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. See precautions in “If your

vehicle overheats” found in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure

to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the

proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze

and 50% demineralized or distilled water.

The use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent,

may damage the engine cooling system.

Outside temperature

down to

Genuine

NISSAN

Long Life

Antifreeze/

Coolant or

equivalent

Demineral-

ized or dis-

tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50% CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant to the MAX level

䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If

there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

MR20DE

LDI0537

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

QR25DE

LDI0589

MR20DE

WDI0591

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark 䊊

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

Make sure to follow the engine oil changing inter-

vals in the maintenance booklet. Operating under

the following conditions may require more fre-

quent oil change:

●repeated short distance driving

●driving in dusty conditions

●stop and go commuting.

QR25DE

LDI0590 LDI0371

MR20DE engine

䊊

AOil filler cap

䊊

BOil drain plug

䊊

COil filter

WDI0521

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. See “Changing engine

oil filter” later in this section.

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual for

drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.

Add engine oil if necessary.

QR25DE engine

䊊

AOil filler cap

䊊

BOil drain plug

䊊

COil filter

WDI0597

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench

by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove

the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket material

remaining on the sealing surface of the

engine. Failure to do so could lead to

engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if

necessary.

MR20DE engine

䊊

AOil filler cap

䊊

BOil drain plug

䊊

COil filter

WDI0521

QR25DE engine

䊊

AOil filler cap

䊊

BOil drain plug

䊊

COil filter

WDI0597

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CAUTION

●Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

●Using transmission fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will

damage the CVT, which is not covered

by the NISSAN new vehicle limited

warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is

required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

For further brake and clutch fluid specification

information, refer to “Capacities and recom-

mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake and clutch

systems. The use of improper fluids can

damage the brake system and affect

the vehicle’s stopping ability.

●Clean the filler cap before removing.

●Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked

containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the

brake warning light comes on, add Genuine

NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up

to the MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid must be added fre-

quently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

LDI0539

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir

(manual transmissions only). Add Genuine

NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up

to the MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid must be added fre-

quently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low

windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on

(if so equipped).

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift

the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the

windshield-washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for windshield-washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir tank with washer fluid con-

centrates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the grille

if spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the windshield-washer fluid reser-

voir tank. Do not use the windshield-

washer reservoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

LDI0539 LDI0540

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-

gen gas generated by the battery is ex-

plosive. Explosive gases can cause

blindness or injury. Do not allow battery

fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics

or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or injury. After touch-

ing a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as

shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

WDI0224

BATTERY

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall

the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Automatic tensioner

2. Generator

3. Water pump

4. Air conditioner compressor (with A/C)

or Idler pulley (without A/C)

5. Crankshaft pulley

WDI0529

MR20DE model

WDI0638

DRIVE BELT

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Crankshaft pulley

2. Idler Pulley

3. Automatic tensioner

4. Water pump

5. Generator

6. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive belt.

The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor

condition, have it replaced or adjusted by a

NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

tion.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs (if so

equipped)

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-

gapping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

QR25DE model

WDI0696 SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer for assistance.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if so

equipped)

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-

ping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

3. Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner

cover upward.

4. Remove the air cleaner filter.

●For the MR20DE, release the 2 retaining

clips 䊊

Aand pull the unit upward.

●For the QR25DE, push the tabs 䊊

Aand

pull the unit upward 䊊

MR20DE

LDI0710

AIR CLEANER

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

5. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-

ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the

housing and latch the clips.

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner not

only cleans the air, it stops the flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and

the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed, and be careful when working

on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the trim panel near the accelera-

tor pedal. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer.

QR25DE

WDI0596

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper

blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

䊊

2Push the release tab, then move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm to remove.

䊊

3Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the

groove.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not

to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊

A. This may

cause clogging or improper windshield-washer

operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin 䊊

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For more information regarding

brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-

nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0337

BRAKES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊

Ais used in

the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type

䊊

Bis used in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-

partment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,

the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse

pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not

affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the

fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-

hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the

underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

LDI0455 LDI0457

(MR20DE engine)

LDI0542

FUSES

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

NOTE:

For checking and replacing fuses on

QR25DE engine models, see a NISSAN

dealer.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tabs 䊊

Aand lifting the cover up from the

front 䊊

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse

block in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with a new

fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links in the holders 䊊

A,䊊

Band 䊊

C. If any of these

fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine

NISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links in

holders 䊊

Aand 䊊

Band 䊊

C, see a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0452

MR20DE

LDI0546

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the storage bin 䊊

3. Pull the storage bin upward and out to re-

move 䊊

B. A fuse guide is on the storage bin.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊

C. The

fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse

block.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with an equiva-

lent good fuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

7. Install the storage bin.

QR25DE

LDI0593 WDI0569

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

䊊

1Open the lid using a coin 䊊

䊊

2Remove the battery 䊊

䊊

3Install a new battery 䊊

Cwith the “+” facing

down.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the

battery across the contact points will seri-

ously deplete the storage capacity.

LDI0484

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

●Do not touch the internal circuit and electric

terminals as it could cause a malfunction.

●When changing the battery, do not let dust

or oil get on the keyfob.

●There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-

tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only

with the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

䊊

4Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then the

button two or three times to check the key-

fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

●An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●The keyfob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

●The operational range of the keyfob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

SDI1867

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so

equipped)

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊

Ainto the slit 䊊

of the corner and twist it to separate the

upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to

protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated 䊊

C䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for

replacement.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

WDI0535

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-

cause the headlight assembly must be removed

from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

●

Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,

etc. entering the headlight body may af-

fect bulb performance. Remove the bulb

from the headlight assembly just before

a replacement bulb is installed.

●Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass could significantly

affect bulb life and/or headlight

performance.

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LIGHTS

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly

Low/High (Halogen) 55/60 H13

Turn/Park 27/7 3457AK

Side marker 4 194

Front fog light* (if so equipped) 55 H11LL

Front map lights* (if so equipped) 8 168

Interior light 8 AL57

Trunk light 5 158

High-mounted stop light*

Inside (if so equipped) 16 921LF

Spoiler (if so equipped) — LED

Rear combination light

Turn signal light 27/7 3057K

Stop/Tail 27/7 3057K

Backup (reversing) 16 921

Rear side marker 4 194

License plate light* 5 W5W

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

1. Front map lights (if so equipped)

2. Interior light

3. Headlight assembly

4. Front fog light (if so equipped)

5. High-mounted stop light (if so

equipped)

6. Spoiler mounted stop light (if so

equipped)

7. License plate light

8. Rear combination light

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb replacement

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

WDI0599

WDI0257

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Use a cloth 䊊

1to protect the interior light hous-

ing.

Use a cloth 䊊

Ato protect the light housing.

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the

“In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light”in the “Instruments and

controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In

case of emergency” section.

Interior light

WDI0206

Map light (if so equipped)

LDI0711

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped). Do not load your ve-

hicle beyond this capacity. Over-

loading your vehicle may result in

reduced tire life, unsafe operat-

ing conditions due to premature

tire failure, or unfavorable han-

dling characteristics and could

also lead to a serious accident.

Loading beyond the specified ca-

pacity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire and loading information label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-

ing information” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section.

䊊

3Original tire size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km) at moderate speeds. The recom-

mended cold tire inflation is set by the

manufacturer to provide the best bal-

ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,

driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the

vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later

in this section.

䊊

6Spare tire size.

LDI0545

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front Original Tire:

P205/60R15

P205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

P225/45R17 240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:

P205/60R15

P205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

P225/45R17 240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:

T125/70D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI

LDI0393

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

WDI0394

Example

WDI0395

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-

ture.

6. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing, then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,

and others.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

Example

WDI0396

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installed

on P225/45R17 size tires. Installation of

the tire chains/cables on P225/45R17 size

tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If

you plan to use tire chains/cables, you

should install P205/55R16 size tires on

your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tires. Other types may

damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-

sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive

at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may

be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-

mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual for tire re-

placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0259

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. Recommended types and

sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, VDC system (if so equipped),

ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-

ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-

eter calibration, headlight aim and

bumper height. Some of these effects

may lead to accidents and could result

in serious personal injury.

●If your vehicle was originally equipped

with 4 tires that were the same size and

you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle may

cause loss of vehicle control in some

driving conditions and cause an acci-

dent and personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics, affect

the VDC system (if so equipped) and/or

interference with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference can

lead to decreased braking efficiency

and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-

fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-

cal and consumer information” section

of this manual for wheel off-set

dimensions.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for tire re-

placement and/or system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS (if so

equipped).

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident:

WARNING

●The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced

with the standard tire at the first oppor-

tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-

tial damage.

●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

●Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle at

speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use

tire chains only on the front (original)

tires.

●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate

than the standard tire. Replace the

spare tire as soon as the tread wear

indicators appear.

●Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

●Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

MEMO

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .........9-2

Fuel recommendation . . .........................9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-5

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ..............................9-6

Specifications.....................................9-7

Engine ........................................9-7

Wheels and tires ...............................9-8

Dimensions and weights ........................9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ...................................9-9

Vehicle identification ...............................9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ..........9-9

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...............................9-9

Engine serial number...........................9-10

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10

Emission control information label ...............9-11

Tire and loading information label................9-11

Air conditioner specification label................9-11

Installing front license plate ........................9-12

Vehicle loading information ........................9-12

Terms ........................................9-12

Vehicle load capacity ..........................9-13

Loading tips ..................................9-15

Measurement of weights .......................9-15

Towing a trailer ...................................9-16

Maximum load limits ...........................9-16

Towing load/specification.......................9-19

Towing safety .................................9-19

Flat towing....................................9-23

Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-24

Emission control system warranty ..................9-25

Reporting safety defects (US only) .................9-25

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-25

Event Data Recorders (EDR).......................9-26

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

In the event of a collision .......................9-27

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal 55.0 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.

Engine oil *7

Drain and Refill

With oil filter change MR20DE 4-1/8 qt 3-3/8 qt 3.9

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1

QR25DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3

Without oil filter

change MR20DE 3-7/8 qt 3-1/8 qt 3.6

QR25DE 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0

Cooling system

With reservoirMR20DE 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal 7.0 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

QR25DE CVT 1-7/8 gal 1-5/8 gal 7.1

M/T 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal 6.9

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *2

Manual transmission gear oil

MR20DE — — — Genuine NISSAN gear oil (ETL8997B) 75W-80 or equivalent *3

QR25DE — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi

75W-85 or equivalent *4

Brake and clutch fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section *8 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent

DOT3*5

Multi-purpose grease ———NLGINo.2(Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6

Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6

Windshield-washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-

tifreeze or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”

*2: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by

the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*3: If Genuine NISSAN gear oil is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is

available.

*4: If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Muti 75W85 is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genu-

ine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.

*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.

*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”

*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

*8: See your NISSAN dealer for service.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

MR20DE and QR25DE engine except Spec-V

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

QR25DE engine Spec-V only

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating

of at lease 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)

can be used, but only under the following precau-

tions:

●have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium as soon as possible.

●avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage

the fuel system components and is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol

with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-

termined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

Technical and consumer information 9-3

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

CAUTION

●Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle

not specifically designed for E-85 fuel

can damage fuel system components

and is not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

●E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded

gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. See “Capacities

and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this

section. NISSAN recommends the use of an

energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel

economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-

placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

WTI0183

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer

●stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN

A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-

lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air

conditioner system.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE

Model MR20DE QR25DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline 4-cylinder, inline

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 121.86 (1,997) 151.82 (2,488)

Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–3–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

M/T

CVT (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle

speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug

PLZKAR6A-11 (all except California mod-

els)

FXE20HR-11 (California models)

DILKAR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 9-7

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Steel 15 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum and steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum 17 x 7.0JJ 1.97 (50)

Tire size P205/60R15

P205/55R16

P225/45VR17

P225/45WR17

Spare tire T125/70D16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Unit: in (mm)

Model MR20DE QR25DE

Overall

length 179.8 (4,567) 180.1 (4,575)

Overall

width 70.5 (1,790) 70.5 (1,790)

Overall

height 59.5 (1,511)

59.1 (1,501)

(MT), 59.5 (1,

511) (CVT)

Front Track

15 X 6.5 and 16 X 6.5

inch wheel 59.8 (1,520) N/A

17 X 7.0 inch wheel N/A 59.5 (1,510)

Rear Track

15 X 6.5 and 16 X 6.5

inch wheel 60.8 (1,544) N/A

17 X 7.0 inch wheel N/A 60.4 (1,534)

Wheelbase 105.7 (2,685) 105.7 (2,685)

Gross ve-

hicle weight

rating

lb (kg)

See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label” on the center pillar between the driv-

er’s side front and rear doors.

Gross axle

weight rat-

ing

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

9-8 Technical and consumer information

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsibil-

ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is

attached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

STI0457 STI0465

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 9-9

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle

Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review

it carefully.

MR20DE

STI0466

QR25DE

WTI0096 STI0349

9-10 Technical and consumer information

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as

shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to

the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0188 WTI0174 WTI0198

Technical and consumer information 9-11

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:

䊊

1Slide the metal mounting clips onto the li-

cense plate holder as indicated.

䊊

2Make holes on the plastic finisher at the

location mark (small dimple) using a 0.31 in

(8 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.

Install the license plate holder using the two

screws provided with the holder.

䊊

3Mount the license plate using two M6-

14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:

3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

WTI0187

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-12 Technical and consumer information

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped).

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

LTI0152

9-14 Technical and consumer information

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

See “Measurement of Weights” later in

this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle

can break, tire damage could oc-

cur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s

warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-

ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are

given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-

move items to bring all weights below the

ratings.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-

tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight

plus its cargo weight.

●When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.

(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system must be used.

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle

(including passengers and cargo) plus the total

trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or

using improper towing equipment could ad-

versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-

formance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced for low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0164

TOWING A TRAILER

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

temperatures on graded roads can affect engine

performance and cause overheating. The engine

protection mode, which helps reduce the chance

of engine damage, could activate and automati-

cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may

decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully

to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather

and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a

safe area. Allow the engine to cool and

return to normal operation. See “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures is not covered by

NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of

the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load

specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue

load must be within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-

comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight

(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. The GVW equals the combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

WTI0160 TI1012M

Technical and consumer information 9-17

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a

base vehicle with driver and any options required

to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,

cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the

trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and

reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity

and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to

confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured

using platform type scales commonly found at

truck stops, highway weigh stations, building

supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for

tongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of

the passengers and cargo that are normally

in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh

your trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is

towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not

more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown

on the trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to

make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-

ings.

Example:

●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo and

hitch - 3,820 lb. (1732 kg).

●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

3,920 lb. (1778 kg).

●Maximum Towing Load from “Towing

Load/Specification⬙chart - 1,000 lb. (454

kg).

3,920 lb. (1778 kg) GVWR

– 3,820 lb. (1732 kg) GVW

= 100 lb. (45 kg) Available for tongue

weight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for

towing

100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-

ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-

tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the

trailer tongue load specification recommended

by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load

becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-

tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification shown in

the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the

calculated available tongue weight is greater

than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less

than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to

match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within

the required ratings.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWING

LOAD *1 1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUE

LOAD 100 (45)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated

assuming a base vehicle with driver and any

options required to achieve the rating. Additional

passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment

will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your

vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.

Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to

the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-

erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,

rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable

of towing a trailer heavier than the weight

rating of the hitch components. Never ex-

ceed the weight rating of the hitch compo-

nents. Doing so can cause serious personal

injury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and

the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the

trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should

be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting

caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-

dling. Sway control devices may be used to help

control these affects. If you choose to use one,

contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make

sure the sway control device will work with the

vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-

tem. Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the sway

control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that

has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to

the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of

towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the

Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this

section.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

CAUTION

●Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

●The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

●Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-

tem, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

●To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

receiver when not in use.

●After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt

holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water

or dust from entering the passenger

compartment.

●Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available power-

type module/converter must be used to

provide power for all trailer lighting. This

unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct

power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and

turn signal circuits as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a module/converter

that exceeds these power requirements

may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-

tain the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. For assistance in hooking up

trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-

table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in

the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity

low.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half. Also make sure the load is

balanced side to side.

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

●Determine the overall height of the vehicle

and trailer so the required clearance is

known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-

ently becoming unlatched.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P

(Park) position before blocking the

wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-

sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

●While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-

crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-

tain adequate control, reduce your speed

and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or

repeated use of the brakes when descend-

ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness

and could cause overheating. Shifting to a

lower gear instead provides “engine brak-

ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-

quently.

●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a

high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this owner’s manual.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do

tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the ve-

hicle.

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or

applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a

safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described earlier in this section.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-

mission to a lower gear for engine braking

when driving down steep or long hills. This

will help slow the vehicle without applying

the brakes.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-

trol (if so equipped) not be used while tow-

ing a trailer.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

●Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for vehicles that

are towing trailers. Obey the local speed

limits.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50

miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-

ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or

rear bumper.

●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights

before backing the trailer into the water or

the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, transmission fluid

should be changed more frequently. For

additional information, see the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in

this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-

ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-

sion parts due to lack of transmission

lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously

variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly

MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission

●Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

●After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and

idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-

tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine

after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing

may cause damage to internal transmission

parts.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

9-24 Technical and consumer information

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then

blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is

“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20

seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the

MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-

dition, drive the vehicle through the following

pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If

you cannot or do not want to perform the driving

pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US

only)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Technical and consumer information 9-25

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner according to traffic con-

ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolant

temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-

low the engine to idle until the gauge needle

points between the C and H (normal oper-

ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h), then quickly release the accelerator

pedal completely and keep it released for at

least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9

minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-

utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector in

the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps1-8atleast one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-

able between steps. Do not stop the engine until

step 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

9-26 Technical and consumer information

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only

be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-

mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations

and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-

cedures, this manual is the same one used by the

factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN

dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN

Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service

and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later contact:

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year

and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact

your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area

call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-

387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-

tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely

event, there is some important information you

should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize

the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to

cut costs, among other reasons.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-27

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN

collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts

made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-

tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its

resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.

NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,

nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage

caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-

tection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-

necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the

end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to

minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the

windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-

genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such

built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-

ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws

that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-

ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during

the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-

tect you, so you can take action to protect your-

self.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

9-28 Technical and consumer information

10 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........5-25

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-43

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact

air bag system) ...............1-50

Side and curtain (See supplemental

side air bag and curtain side-impact

air bag system) ...............1-55

Air bag warning labels .............1-58

Air bag warning light...........1-58, 2-14

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ..........4-18

Air conditioner service ...........4-22

Air conditioner specification label .....9-11

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .............9-6

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-14

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-22

Air flow charts..................4-19

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .........2-17

Anchor point locations .............1-28

Antenna .....................4-61

Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-10

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-25

Armrests .....................1-7

Audible reminders ...............2-16

Audio system ..................4-23

Compact disc (CD)

player ..........4-33, 4-36, 4-42, 4-47

FM/AM radio with compact disc

(CD) player..............4-31, 4-34

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player..............4-38, 4-44

Audio System

iPod姞Player..........4-54, 4-55, 4-57

Audio system

Radio ....................4-23

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-60

USB interface ............4-50, 4-52

Automatic

Automatic power window switch .....2-35

Automatic door locks ..............3-6

AUX jack ..........4-33, 4-37, 4-43, 4-49

Battery......................8-15

Charge warning light ............2-11

Before starting the engine ...........5-11

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-16

Block heater

Engine ....................5-29

Bluetooth姞hands-free phone system .....4-62

Booster seats ..................1-39

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-25

Brake fluid ..................8-13

Brake light (See stop light).........8-29

Brake system ................5-24

Brake warning light .............2-10

Brake wear indicators ........2-16, 8-21

Parking brake operation ..........5-19

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-21

Brakes ......................8-21

Break-in schedule ...............5-22

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-23

Brightness/contrast button ...........4-8

Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-10

Bulb replacement ................8-29

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...................9-2

Car phone or CB radio .............4-62

Cargo net ....................2-32

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12

CD care and cleaning .............4-59

CD player

(See audio system) . . . .4-33, 4-36, 4-42, 4-47

Child restraint with top tether strap ......1-28

Child restraints.......1-23, 1-23, 1-24, 1-26

Precautions on child

restraints ........1-24, 1-31, 1-35, 1-39

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-28

Child safety rear door lock............3-7

Chimes, audible reminders...........2-16

Cleaning exterior and interior ..........7-2

Clock ...............4-32, 4-35, 4-40

Clutch

Clutch fluid ..................8-14

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10

Cold weather driving ..............5-28

Compact disc (CD)

player ............4-33, 4-36, 4-42, 4-47

Console box ...................2-31

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-12

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ..................8-13

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-12

Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16

Control panel buttons ...............4-2

Brightness/contrast button ..........4-8

Enter button ..................4-2

Setting button .................4-5

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel).......4-60

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-14

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-9

Checking engine coolant level ........8-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7

Corrosion protection ...............7-6

Cruise control ..................5-20

Cup holders ...................2-30

Curtain side-impact air bag system

(See supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag system)...........1-55

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-23

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-21

Dimensions and weights .............9-8

Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-23

Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2

Door locks ..................3-4, 3-5

Door open warning light.............2-11

Drive belt .....................8-16

Driving

Cold weather driving ............5-28

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-12

Driving with manual transmission ......5-17

Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Economy - fuel ..................5-22

Emission control information label .......9-11

Emission control system warranty .......9-25

Engine

Before starting the engine..........5-11

Block heater .................5-29

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-9

Changing engine oil .............8-11

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12

Checking engine coolant level ........8-8

Checking engine oil level ...........8-9

Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7

Engine cooling system ............8-8

Engine oil ...................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-11

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5

Engine serial number ............9-10

Engine specifications .............9-7

Starting the engine .............5-11

Engine oil pressure gauge ............2-7

Enter button ....................4-2

Event data recorders ..............9-26

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2

Eyeglass case ..................2-28

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) ......2-24

Flat tire .......................6-2

Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................8-13

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Clutch fluid ..................8-14

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ..................8-13

Engine coolant.................8-8

Engine oil ...................8-9

F.M.V.S.S. certification label...........9-10

Fog light switch .................2-24

Folding rear seat ............1-3, 1-4, 1-5

10-2

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-50

Front seats .....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Fuel economy ................5-22

Fuel gauge ...................2-6

Fuel octane rating ...............9-4

Fuel recommendation .............9-3

Fuel-filler door and cap ...........3-25

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25

Fuses .......................8-22

Fusible links ...................8-23

Gascap .....................3-25

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7

Engine oil pressure gauge ..........2-7

Fuel gauge ...................2-6

g-force gauge .................2-6

Odometer ...................2-4

Speedometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................2-5

Trip computer .................2-4

Trip odometer .................2-4

General maintenance ...............8-2

g-force gauge ...................2-6

Glove box.....................2-31

Glove box lock ..................2-31

Grocery hooks ..................2-33

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth姞.....4-62

Hazard warning flasher switch .........2-24

Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-22

Headlight control switch ............2-22

Headlights ....................8-28

Heated seats ...................2-26

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-14

Heater operation ...............4-17

Hood release...................3-23

Horn .......................2-25

Ignition switch ...................5-7

Immobilizer system .........2-19, 3-2, 5-10

Important vehicle information label .......9-10

In-cabin microfilter ................8-19

Increasing fuel economy.............5-22

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders) .....................2-9

Inside mirror ...................3-28

Instrument brightness control ..........2-23

Instrument panel ...............0-6, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-23

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range .............3-13

Key operation ................3-14

Mechanical key ................3-4

Remote keyless entry operation.......3-17

Troubleshooting guide ............3-22

Warning signals ...............3-22

Interior light....................2-39

Interior trunk lid release .............3-24

iPod姞Player ............4-54, 4-55, 4-57

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-26

Jump starting ...................6-8

Keyfob battery replacement ...........8-25

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system).........3-17

Keys, Except Intelligent Key............3-2

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....9-11

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-10

Emission control information label .....9-11

Engine serial number ............9-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label.........9-10

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-58

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System ......................1-26

License plate

Installing the license plate ..........9-12

10-3

Light

Air bag warning light .........1-58, 2-14

Brake light (See stop light) .........8-29

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-10

Bulb replacement ..............8-29

Charge warning light ............2-11

Fog light switch ...............2-24

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-22

Headlight control switch ..........2-22

Headlights ..................8-28

Interior light..................2-39

Light bulbs ..................8-28

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ......................2-13

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-52

Security indicator light............2-15

Spotlights (See map light) .........2-40

Trunk light ..................2-41

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...................2-9

Lights

Map lights ..................2-40

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Door locks ................3-4, 3-5

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25

Glove box lock ................2-31

Power door locks ...............3-6

Trunk lid lock opener lever..........3-24

Low fuel warning light ..............2-12

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-13

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

Maintenance

General maintenance .............8-2

Inside the vehicle ...............8-3

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

Outside the vehicle ..............8-2

Seat belt maintenance............1-22

Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4

Malfunction indicator light ............2-15

Manual front seat adjustment...........1-2

Manual windows .................2-37

Map lights ....................2-40

Map pocket....................2-27

Meters and gauges ................2-3

Instrument brightness control ........2-23

Mirror

Inside mirror .................3-28

Outside mirror control ............3-28

Vanity mirror .................3-27

Moonroof .....................2-37

NISSAN Intelligent Key™..........3-3, 3-11

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer

system ................2-19, 3-2, 5-10

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)......9-4

Odometer .....................2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine oil .............8-11

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12

Checking engine oil level ...........8-9

Engine oil ...................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5

Outside mirror control ..............3-28

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats...........6-11

Owner’s manual order form ...........9-27

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information ....................9-27

Parking

Parking brake operation ...........5-19

Parking/parking on hills ...........5-23

Phone, Bluetooth姞hands-free system .....4-62

Power

Power door locks ...............3-6

Power outlet .................2-26

Power rear windows .............2-35

Power steering system ...........5-24

Power windows ...............2-34

Rear power windows ............2-35

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-24, 1-31, 1-35, 1-39

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-13

10-4

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-43

Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Programmable features ..............4-5

Push starting ...................6-10

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-62

FM/AM radio with compact disc

(CD) player ..............4-31, 4-34

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player ..............4-38, 4-44

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-60

Readiness for inspection maintenance

(I/M) test .....................9-25

Rear center seat belt ..............1-19

Rear power windows ..............2-35

Rear seat ................1-3, 1-4, 1-5

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.......................2-21

RearView Monitor .................4-8

Recorders

Event data ..................9-26

Refrigerant recommendation ...........9-6

Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9

Reporting safety defects (US only) .......9-25

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Child seat belts .....1-24, 1-31, 1-35, 1-39

Reporting safety defects (US only) .....9-25

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-2

Seat belt

Child safety..................1-23

Infants and small children ..........1-23

Injured Person ................1-16

Larger children ................1-24

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-13

Pregnant women...............1-16

Rear center seat belt ............1-19

Seat belt extenders .............1-22

Seat belt maintenance............1-22

Seat belts...................1-13

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-21

Three-point type with retractor .......1-16

Seat belt warning light..............2-13

Seatback pockets ................2-29

Seats

Adjustment...................1-2

Front seats ...................1-2

Heated seats .................2-26

Manual front seat adjustment.........1-2

Rear seat ..............1-3, 1-4, 1-5

Security indicator light..............2-15

Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer

system), engine start ........2-19, 3-2, 5-10

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-21

Service manual order form ...........9-27

Servicing air conditioner.............4-22

Setting button ...................4-5

Shift lock release.................5-16

Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .....................5-13

Manual transmission .............5-18

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-21

Side air bag system (See supplemental

side air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag system) ...................1-55

Spark plug replacement .............8-17

Speedometer ...................2-4

Spotlights (See map light) ...........2-40

SRS warning label ................1-58

Starting

Before starting the engine..........5-11

Jump starting .................6-8

Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Push starting .................6-10

Starting the engine .............5-11

Steering

Power steering system ...........5-24

Tilting steering wheel ............3-27

Steering wheel audio control switch ......4-60

Stop light .....................8-29

Storage ......................2-27

Storage bin....................2-28

Storage tray ...................2-28

Sunglasses case.................2-28

Sunglasses holder ................2-28

Sunroof (see Moonroof) .............2-37

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-58

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-58, 2-14

Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-50

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels .......1-58

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-43

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-43

Supplemental side and curtain side-impact

air bag system ..................1-55

10-5

Switch

Automatic power window switch ......2-35

Fog light switch ...............2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-24

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-22

Headlight control switch ..........2-22

Ignition switch .................5-7

Power door lock switch ............3-6

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-21

Turn signal switch ..............2-24

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-25

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20

Tachometer ....................2-5

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),

engine start .............2-19, 3-2, 5-10

Three-way catalyst ................5-2

Tilting steering wheel ..............3-27

Tire

Flat tire .....................6-2

Spare tire ................6-3, 8-41

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-11

Tire chains ..................8-38

Tire placard..................9-11

Tire pressure .................8-31

Tire rotation..................8-38

Types of tires .................8-37

Uniform tire quality grading .........9-24

Wheels and tires...............8-31

Wheel/tire size.................9-8

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-28

Towing

Flat towing ..................9-23

Tow truck towing...............6-12

Towing load/specification ..........9-19

Trailer towing .................9-16

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ..................8-13

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-12

Driving with manual transmission ......5-17

Selector lock release ............5-16

Travel (See registering your vehicle in another

country) ......................9-9

Trip computer ...................2-4

Trip odometer ...................2-4

Trunk access through the rear seat .....1-4, 1-5

Trunk lid lock opener lever............3-24

Trunk light ....................2-41

Turn signal switch ................2-24

Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-24

USB interface

Audio file operation ..........4-50, 4-52

Vanity mirror ...................3-27

Vehicle dimensions and weights .........9-8

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-25

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-26

Vehicle identification ...............9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) .................9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9

Vehicle loading information ...........9-12

Vehicle recovery .................6-14

Vehicle security system .............2-17

Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle

immobilizer system), engine start. .2-19, 3-2, 5-10

Ventilators ....................4-14

Warning

Air bag warning light .........1-58, 2-14

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-10

Battery charge warning light ........2-11

Brake warning light .............2-10

Door open warning light...........2-11

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-11

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-24

Low fuel warning light ............2-12

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ......................2-13

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-52

Seat belt warning light............2-13

Vehicle security system ...........2-17

10-6

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-58

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...................2-9

Warning lights ...................2-9

Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20

Weights (See dimensions and weights) .....9-8

Wheels and tires.................8-31

Wheel/tire size...................9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle

in another country .................9-9

Windows

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-35

Manual windows ...............2-37

Power rear windows.............2-35

Power windows ...............2-34

Rear power windows ............2-35

Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-20

Windshield-washer fluid.............8-14

Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20

Wiper blades.................8-20

10-7

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

MR20DE and QR25DE engine except Spec-V

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

QR25DE engine Spec-V only

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating

of at lease 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)

can be used, but only under the following precau-

tions:

●have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium as soon as possible.

●avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-

line is recommended.

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage

the fuel system components and is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical

and consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

●Engine oil with API Certification Mark

●Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Nissan 2010 Sentra Users Manual Owner's

Nissan-2010-Nissan-Sentra-Owners-Manual-818538 nissan-2010-nissan-sentra-owners-manual-818538

2010 Sentra to the manual b50f2eb5-89ee-4604-8f1b-631dcbac3116

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation